1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1450 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1451 When the cursor is inside an inset
1454 arg "inset-select-all"
1457 selects the content of the inset.
1461 arg "inset-select-all"
1464 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1469 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1472 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1476 \begin_layout Section
1478 \begin_inset Index idx
1481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1488 \begin_inset Index idx
1491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1500 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1507 \begin_layout Standard
1508 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1509 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1512 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1515 or the toolbar button
1521 to undo some mistake.
1522 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1524 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1527 or the toolbar button
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1545 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1548 \begin_layout Standard
1549 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1558 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1559 This is a consequence of the 100
1560 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1563 step undo limit mentioned above.
1566 \begin_layout Standard
1575 work on almost everything in LyX.
1576 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1580 \begin_layout Section
1582 \begin_inset Index idx
1585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1594 \begin_layout Standard
1595 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1598 \begin_layout Enumerate
1603 \begin_layout Itemize
1608 once anywhere in the edit window.
1609 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1613 \begin_layout Enumerate
1618 \begin_layout Itemize
1624 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1627 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1630 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1633 \begin_layout Itemize
1634 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1636 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1643 \begin_layout Enumerate
1644 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1648 \begin_layout Standard
1649 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1650 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1654 \begin_layout Section
1656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1658 name "sec:Navigating"
1663 \begin_inset Index idx
1666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1675 \begin_layout Standard
1676 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1679 \begin_layout Itemize
1684 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1685 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1688 \begin_layout Itemize
1689 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1691 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1693 \begin_inset space ~
1698 or by the toolbar button
1701 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1707 \begin_layout Itemize
1708 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1710 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1713 and use the same menu to return to them.
1714 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1717 \begin_layout Standard
1721 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1726 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1727 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1729 \begin_inset space ~
1734 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1735 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1736 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1737 your last editing position.
1740 \begin_layout Standard
1745 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1748 \begin_layout Subsection
1750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1752 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1759 \begin_layout Standard
1760 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1761 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1762 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1764 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1770 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1774 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1781 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1786 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1790 \begin_layout Standard
1791 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1792 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1793 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1794 dialog and to modify the citation.
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1800 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1801 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1809 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1812 \begin_layout Standard
1813 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1814 you further to control the display.
1819 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1820 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1826 option keeps it in the current view state.
1827 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1831 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1832 \begin_inset space ~
1835 3, the subsections of sections
1836 \begin_inset space ~
1839 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1844 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1849 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1859 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1862 \begin_layout Standard
1869 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1870 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1884 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1885 So, for example, you can move section
1886 \begin_inset space ~
1890 \begin_inset space ~
1893 2.4 or after section
1894 \begin_inset space ~
1898 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 (or the corresponding key bindings
1919 ) you can change the level of sections.
1920 So you can for example make section
1921 \begin_inset space ~
1925 \begin_inset space ~
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1935 \begin_layout Section
1936 Input/Word Completion
1937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1939 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1944 \begin_inset Index idx
1947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1954 \begin_inset Index idx
1957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_layout Standard
1989 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
1991 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
1992 is used to propose completions.
1995 \begin_layout Standard
1996 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
1998 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2003 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2010 \begin_inset space ~
2014 \begin_inset space ~
2019 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2023 \begin_inset space ~
2028 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2029 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2033 \begin_inset space ~
2039 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2040 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2041 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2042 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2045 \begin_layout Standard
2046 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2047 are completions available.
2052 key to accept a proposed completion.
2053 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2054 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2055 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2062 \begin_layout Standard
2063 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2064 ing options for text.
2065 The special math option
2069 enables characters to be composed.
2070 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2071 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2074 , you can then input the characters
2075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2086 to a formula to get it.
2087 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2088 of the math toolbar.
2089 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2093 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2094 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2103 \begin_layout Section
2105 \begin_inset Index idx
2108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2115 \begin_inset Index idx
2118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_inset Index idx
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2181 \begin_layout Standard
2182 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2195 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2197 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2201 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2208 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2215 \begin_layout Standard
2219 \begin_inset space ~
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2248 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2252 \begin_layout Labeling
2253 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2257 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2258 LatexCommand nomenclature
2260 description "Tabulator key"
2266 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2267 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2268 \begin_inset space ~
2272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2274 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2281 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2285 , especially section
2286 \begin_inset space ~
2290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2292 reference "sub:Lists"
2298 If you are still confused, look in the
2303 \begin_inset Newline newline
2310 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2311 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2315 \begin_layout Labeling
2316 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2320 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2321 LatexCommand nomenclature
2323 description "Escape key"
2330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2337 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2338 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2341 \begin_layout Labeling
2342 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2348 \begin_inset space ~
2352 \begin_inset space ~
2359 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2360 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2364 \begin_layout Standard
2365 There are three modifier keys:
2368 \begin_layout Labeling
2369 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2387 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2388 LatexCommand nomenclature
2390 description "Control key"
2394 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2395 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2399 \begin_layout Itemize
2408 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2411 \begin_layout Itemize
2420 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2423 \begin_layout Itemize
2432 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2436 \begin_layout Labeling
2437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2455 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2456 LatexCommand nomenclature
2458 description "Shift key"
2462 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2463 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2466 \begin_layout Labeling
2467 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2485 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2486 LatexCommand nomenclature
2488 description "Alt or Meta key"
2492 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2493 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2494 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2500 \begin_inset Newline newline
2503 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2505 menu accelerator keys
2508 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2509 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2513 \begin_layout Standard
2514 For example, the sequence
2515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2521 \begin_inset space ~
2525 \begin_inset space ~
2531 \begin_inset space ~
2539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2558 \begin_inset space ~
2564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2574 \begin_layout Standard
2579 manual lists all other things bound to the
2587 \begin_layout Standard
2588 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2589 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2590 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2591 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2592 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2593 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2594 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2596 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2612 followed by a capital
2619 \begin_layout Chapter
2621 \begin_inset Index idx
2624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2633 \begin_layout Section
2635 \begin_inset Index idx
2638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2647 \begin_layout Subsection
2651 \begin_layout Standard
2652 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2653 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2654 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2655 numbering schemes, and so on.
2656 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2657 and format the title of your document differently.
2660 \begin_layout Standard
2665 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2666 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2667 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2668 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2669 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2672 \begin_layout Subsection
2674 \begin_inset Index idx
2677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2686 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2693 \begin_layout Standard
2694 You can select a class using the
2696 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2697 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2701 \begin_inset Index idx
2704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2711 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2715 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2719 \begin_layout Standard
2720 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2724 \begin_layout Description
2725 Article for basic articles
2728 \begin_layout Description
2729 Report for basic reports
2732 \begin_layout Description
2733 Book for writing a book
2736 \begin_layout Description
2737 Letter for US-style letters
2740 \begin_layout Standard
2741 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2742 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2743 will include many of these.
2744 Here are some of the classes.
2745 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2747 Special Document Classes
2756 \begin_layout Description
2757 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2760 \begin_layout Description
2761 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2765 \begin_layout Description
2766 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2770 \begin_layout Description
2771 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2772 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2773 There are three article layouts available.
2774 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2775 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2776 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2777 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2782 sequential numbering
2783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2786 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2787 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2788 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2789 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2792 \begin_layout Description
2793 Beamer Layout for presentations
2796 \begin_layout Description
2797 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2798 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2802 \begin_layout Description
2803 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2806 \begin_layout Description
2808 \begin_inset space ~
2811 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2814 \begin_layout Description
2815 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2818 \begin_layout Description
2819 Foils Used to make transparencies
2822 \begin_layout Description
2823 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2824 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2828 \begin_layout Description
2829 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2830 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2833 \begin_layout Description
2834 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2837 \begin_layout Description
2838 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2843 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2844 (Is used by this document.)
2847 \begin_layout Description
2848 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2851 \begin_layout Description
2852 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2855 \begin_layout Description
2860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2867 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2868 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2870 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2873 \begin_layout Description
2874 Slides Used to make transparencies
2877 \begin_layout Description
2879 \begin_inset space ~
2882 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2883 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2890 \begin_layout Standard
2891 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2893 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2899 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2900 of the document classes.
2903 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2907 \begin_layout Standard
2908 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2910 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2911 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2913 \begin_inset Index idx
2916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2933 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2934 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2936 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2939 \begin_layout Standard
2941 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2942 and some of them, like
2946 , are highly specialized.
2947 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2948 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2950 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2951 by some document class.
2952 There are just too many of them.
2953 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2956 \begin_layout Standard
2957 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2965 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2966 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2967 document class for a new file.
2968 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2973 Installing new LaTeX files
2974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2981 manual for information on how to install them.
2982 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2988 \begin_layout Standard
2989 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
2990 does not include support for every document class people might want to
2992 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
2993 dissertations submitted to those universities.
2994 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2996 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3000 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3006 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3009 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3018 \begin_inset Index idx
3021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3030 \begin_layout Standard
3031 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3032 chosen document class.
3033 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3034 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3041 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3045 \begin_inset Index idx
3048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3055 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3059 \begin_layout Standard
3060 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3061 always installed by default.
3062 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3063 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3064 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3065 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3066 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3067 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3068 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3071 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3075 \begin_inset Index idx
3078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3079 Reconfiguration of LyX
3085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3088 Installing new LaTeX files
3089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3096 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3099 \begin_layout Standard
3100 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3108 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3109 LyX will advise you about these things.
3117 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3121 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3126 \begin_inset Index idx
3129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3130 Document ! Local Layout
3138 \begin_layout Standard
3139 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3140 used in a variety of different documents.
3141 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3142 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3143 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3144 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3145 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3146 What you want is LyX's
3147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3163 manual for information on how to use it.
3166 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3170 \begin_layout Standard
3171 Each class has a default set of options.
3172 Here's a quick table describing them:
3175 \begin_layout Standard
3176 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3182 \begin_layout Standard
3184 \begin_inset Tabular
3185 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3186 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3187 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3188 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3189 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3191 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3645 \begin_layout Standard
3646 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3652 \begin_layout Standard
3653 You're probably also wondering what
3654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3658 \begin_inset space ~
3662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3666 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3667 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3672 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3677 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3687 headings, there are also
3695 headings, and so on.
3696 We will describe these headings fully in section
3697 \begin_inset space ~
3701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3703 reference "sub:Headings"
3710 \begin_layout Subsection
3712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3714 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3719 \begin_inset Index idx
3722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3729 \begin_inset Index idx
3732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3741 \begin_layout Standard
3742 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3744 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3751 \begin_inset space ~
3759 \begin_inset space ~
3764 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3766 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3767 to use for your document.
3768 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3772 \begin_layout Standard
3776 \begin_inset space ~
3783 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3789 \begin_inset space ~
3794 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3795 You can choose between the following five options:
3798 \begin_layout Labeling
3799 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3804 Use default page style of current class.
3807 \begin_layout Labeling
3808 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3813 No page numbers or headings.
3816 \begin_layout Labeling
3817 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3825 \begin_layout Labeling
3826 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3831 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3832 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3833 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3836 \begin_layout Labeling
3837 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3842 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3843 have the LaTeX-package
3848 \begin_inset Index idx
3851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3852 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3858 How they are defined is explained in section
3859 \begin_inset space ~
3863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3865 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3874 \begin_inset space ~
3878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3880 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3887 \begin_layout Subsection
3888 Paper Size and Orientation
3889 \begin_inset Index idx
3892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3893 Document ! Paper size
3899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3901 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3908 \begin_layout Standard
3909 You can find the following options in the menu
3912 \begin_inset space ~
3919 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3923 \begin_inset Index idx
3926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3935 \begin_layout Labeling
3936 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3940 \begin_inset space ~
3945 What size paper to print on.
3950 \begin_layout Itemize
3956 \begin_layout Itemize
3962 \begin_layout Itemize
3968 \begin_layout Itemize
3974 \begin_layout Itemize
3977 US letter, US legal, US executive
3980 \begin_layout Itemize
3986 \begin_layout Itemize
3993 \begin_layout Labeling
3994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3999 To choose whether to output as
4010 \begin_layout Labeling
4011 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4015 \begin_inset space ~
4020 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4021 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4024 \begin_layout Subsection
4026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4033 \begin_inset Index idx
4036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4043 \begin_inset Index idx
4046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4055 \begin_layout Standard
4056 Paper margins are set in the menu
4058 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4062 \begin_inset Index idx
4065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4074 \begin_layout Standard
4075 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4076 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4077 the paper format and the font size into account.
4080 \begin_layout Subsection
4084 \begin_layout Standard
4085 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4090 That includes the paragraph environments.
4091 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4092 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4093 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4094 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4103 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4105 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4106 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4107 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4110 \begin_layout Section
4111 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4112 \begin_inset Index idx
4115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4116 Paragraph ! Indentation
4124 \begin_layout Subsection
4126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4128 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4135 \begin_layout Standard
4136 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4137 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4140 \begin_layout Standard
4141 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4142 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4143 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4144 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4148 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4154 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4155 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4156 language than English.
4157 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4161 \begin_layout Standard
4162 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4163 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4165 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4166 LyX takes care of that.
4167 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4169 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4170 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4171 of a page, and so on.
4175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4176 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4181 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4182 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4186 these pre-coded spacings.
4187 We will explain more later.
4190 \begin_layout Subsection
4191 Paragraph Separation
4192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4194 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4199 \begin_inset Index idx
4202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4203 Paragraph ! Separation
4211 \begin_layout Standard
4219 \begin_inset space ~
4227 \begin_inset space ~
4234 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4238 \begin_inset Index idx
4241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4247 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4250 \begin_layout Subsection
4254 \begin_layout Standard
4255 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4258 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4260 \begin_inset space ~
4265 dialog and toggle the
4268 \begin_inset space ~
4273 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4276 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4280 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4281 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4285 \begin_layout Standard
4286 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4287 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4290 \begin_layout Subsection
4292 \begin_inset Index idx
4295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4296 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4304 \begin_layout Standard
4307 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4311 \begin_inset Index idx
4314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4323 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4327 \begin_inset space ~
4336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4337 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4342 \begin_inset Index idx
4345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4346 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4351 installed to use this feature.
4356 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4358 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4360 \begin_inset space ~
4365 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4366 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4369 \begin_layout Section
4370 Paragraph Environments
4371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4373 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4378 \begin_inset Index idx
4381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4382 Paragraph ! Environments
4388 \begin_inset Index idx
4391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4392 Paragraph environments|(
4400 \begin_layout Subsection
4404 \begin_layout Standard
4405 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4408 \begin_layout Standard
4427 \begin_inset Newline newline
4430 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4431 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4432 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4441 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4444 \begin_layout Standard
4445 A paragraph environment is simply a
4446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4453 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4454 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4455 scheme, labels, and so on.
4456 Additionally, you can
4457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4464 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4465 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4466 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4467 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4469 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4471 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4474 \begin_layout Standard
4475 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4476 \begin_inset Graphics
4477 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4483 at the left end of the toolbar.
4484 LyX will change the environment of the
4488 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4489 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4490 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4494 \begin_layout Standard
4503 create a new paragraph using the
4507 paragraph environment.
4509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4516 because if you are in one of these environments:
4519 \begin_layout Itemize
4525 \begin_layout Itemize
4531 \begin_layout Itemize
4537 \begin_layout Itemize
4543 \begin_layout Itemize
4549 \begin_layout Itemize
4555 \begin_layout Itemize
4561 \begin_layout Standard
4562 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4566 , rather than resetting it to
4571 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4572 \begin_inset space ~
4576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4578 reference "sec:Nesting"
4585 \begin_layout Subsection
4589 \begin_layout Standard
4590 The default paragraph environment is
4595 It creates a plain paragraph.
4596 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4597 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4598 this manual) are in the
4605 \begin_layout Standard
4606 You can nest a paragraph using the
4610 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4618 \begin_layout Subsection
4620 \begin_inset Index idx
4623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4632 \begin_layout Standard
4633 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4642 for thanks or contact information.
4643 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4644 page along with today's date.
4645 For other types of documents, the title
4646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4653 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4657 \begin_layout Standard
4658 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4672 Here's how you use them:
4675 \begin_layout Itemize
4676 Put the title of your document in the
4683 \begin_layout Itemize
4684 Put the author name in the
4691 \begin_layout Itemize
4692 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4693 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4699 Note that using this environment is optional.
4700 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4701 If you don't want a date, use the option
4703 Suppress default date on front page
4707 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4708 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4710 \begin_inset space ~
4718 \begin_layout Standard
4719 You can use footnotes to insert
4720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4727 or contact information.
4730 \begin_layout Subsection
4732 \begin_inset Index idx
4735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4742 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4751 \begin_layout Standard
4752 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4753 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4756 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4758 \begin_inset Index idx
4761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4762 Section headings ! Numbered
4770 \begin_layout Standard
4771 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4775 \begin_layout Enumerate
4781 \begin_layout Enumerate
4787 \begin_layout Enumerate
4793 \begin_layout Enumerate
4799 \begin_layout Enumerate
4805 \begin_layout Enumerate
4811 \begin_layout Enumerate
4817 \begin_layout Standard
4818 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4819 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4820 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4823 \begin_layout Standard
4824 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4825 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4826 You group the book into chapters.
4827 LyX does a similar grouping:
4830 \begin_layout Itemize
4835 is divided into either
4846 \begin_layout Itemize
4858 \begin_layout Itemize
4870 \begin_layout Itemize
4882 \begin_layout Itemize
4894 \begin_layout Itemize
4906 \begin_layout Standard
4907 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4915 Not all document types use the
4919 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4924 is the top-level heading.
4932 \begin_layout Standard
4937 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4938 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4940 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4954 \begin_inset Index idx
4957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4958 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4966 \begin_layout Standard
4967 The unnumbered section headings have a
4968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4975 at the end of their name.
4976 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4977 the table of contents, see section
4978 \begin_inset space ~
4982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4991 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4992 Changing the Numbering
4993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4995 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5002 \begin_layout Standard
5003 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5004 in the Table of Contents.
5005 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5007 Just as certain classes start with
5021 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5031 This is something you can change.
5034 \begin_layout Standard
5037 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5041 \begin_inset Index idx
5044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5053 \begin_inset space ~
5057 \begin_inset space ~
5062 you will see two counters.
5067 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5069 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5073 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5074 Short Titles of Headings
5075 \begin_inset Index idx
5078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5079 Section headings ! Short titles
5085 \begin_inset Argument 1
5088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5097 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5104 \begin_layout Standard
5105 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5106 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5107 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5108 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5111 \begin_layout Standard
5112 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5113 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5114 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5115 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5118 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5120 \begin_inset space ~
5126 This will insert a box labeled
5127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5131 \begin_inset space ~
5135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5138 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5139 This also works for captions inside floats.
5140 There can only be one short title per title.
5143 \begin_layout Standard
5144 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5151 \begin_layout Standard
5152 The following information applies to all section headings:
5155 \begin_layout Itemize
5156 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5159 \begin_layout Itemize
5160 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5163 \begin_layout Itemize
5164 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5167 \begin_layout Itemize
5168 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5171 \begin_layout Subsection
5175 \begin_layout Standard
5176 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5190 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5191 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5192 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5193 the text they contain.
5194 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5202 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5205 \begin_layout Standard
5206 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5215 when you start a new paragraph.
5216 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5220 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5221 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5222 have to change back to the
5226 environment yourself.
5229 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5238 \begin_inset Index idx
5241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5250 \begin_layout Standard
5251 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5252 time for the differences.
5261 are identical except for one difference:
5265 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5274 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5277 \begin_layout Standard
5278 Here's an example of the
5291 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5293 See – no indentation!
5297 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5298 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5299 the other paragraph.
5302 \begin_layout Standard
5303 Here's another example, this time in the
5310 \begin_layout Quotation
5316 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5317 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5318 the first line, then
5322 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5326 you were quoting other text.
5329 \begin_layout Quotation
5330 Here's a new paragraph.
5331 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5332 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5335 \begin_layout Standard
5336 As the examples show,
5340 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5341 They should put quotes in the
5346 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5350 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5353 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5355 \begin_inset Index idx
5358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5365 \begin_inset Index idx
5368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5384 \begin_layout Standard
5389 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5395 \begin_inset Newline newline
5398 Which I did not rehearse!
5402 It could be much worse.
5403 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5405 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5406 indented a bit more than the first.
5407 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5413 \begin_inset Newline newline
5416 And make things look fine
5417 \begin_inset Newline newline
5423 arg "newline-insert newline"
5429 \begin_layout Standard
5434 does not indent both margins.
5435 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5436 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5439 arg "newline-insert newline"
5445 \begin_layout Subsection
5447 \begin_inset Index idx
5450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5466 \begin_layout Standard
5467 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5477 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5486 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5487 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5488 describing some general features of all four of them.
5491 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5495 \begin_layout Standard
5496 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5498 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5507 reset the environment to
5511 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5512 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5513 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5517 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5521 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5530 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5532 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5533 you read all of section
5534 \begin_inset space ~
5538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5540 reference "sec:Nesting"
5547 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5549 \begin_inset Index idx
5552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5568 \begin_layout Standard
5569 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5573 paragraph environment.
5574 It has the following properties:
5577 \begin_layout Itemize
5578 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5582 \begin_layout Itemize
5583 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5586 \begin_layout Itemize
5587 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5591 \begin_layout Itemize
5592 The items can have any length.
5593 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5594 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5601 \begin_layout Itemize
5606 environment inside another
5610 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5614 \begin_layout Itemize
5615 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5618 \begin_layout Itemize
5619 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5622 \begin_layout Itemize
5624 \begin_inset space ~
5628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5630 reference "sec:Nesting"
5634 for a full explanation of nesting.
5638 \begin_layout Standard
5639 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5648 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5651 \begin_layout Standard
5652 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5653 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5656 \begin_layout Itemize
5657 The label for the first level
5661 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5665 \begin_layout Itemize
5666 The label for the second level is a dash.
5670 \begin_layout Itemize
5671 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5675 \begin_layout Itemize
5676 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5680 \begin_layout Itemize
5681 Back out to the third level.
5685 \begin_layout Itemize
5686 Back to the second level.
5690 \begin_layout Itemize
5691 Back to the outermost level.
5694 \begin_layout Standard
5695 These are the default labels for an
5700 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5702 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5705 dialog in the submenu
5710 \begin_inset Index idx
5713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5719 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5722 \begin_layout Standard
5723 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5724 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5726 \begin_inset space ~
5730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5732 reference "sec:Nesting"
5739 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5741 \begin_inset Index idx
5744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5753 name "sec:Enumerate"
5760 \begin_layout Standard
5765 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5766 It has these properties:
5769 \begin_layout Enumerate
5770 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5774 \begin_layout Enumerate
5775 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5779 \begin_layout Enumerate
5780 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5783 \begin_layout Enumerate
5788 environment resets the counter to one.
5791 \begin_layout Enumerate
5804 \begin_layout Enumerate
5805 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5806 Items can have any length.
5809 \begin_layout Enumerate
5810 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5813 \begin_layout Enumerate
5814 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5817 \begin_layout Enumerate
5818 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5822 \begin_layout Standard
5831 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5832 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5839 \begin_layout Enumerate
5840 The first level of an
5844 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5848 \begin_layout Enumerate
5849 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5853 \begin_layout Enumerate
5854 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5858 \begin_layout Enumerate
5859 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5862 \begin_layout Enumerate
5863 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5868 \begin_layout Enumerate
5869 Back to the third level
5873 \begin_layout Enumerate
5874 Back to the second level.
5878 \begin_layout Enumerate
5879 Back to the outermost level.
5882 \begin_layout Standard
5883 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5887 environment, see section
5888 \begin_inset space ~
5892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5894 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5899 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5902 \begin_layout Standard
5903 There is more to nesting
5907 environments than we've stated here.
5908 You should read section
5909 \begin_inset space ~
5913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5915 reference "sec:Nesting"
5919 to learn more about nesting.
5922 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5924 \begin_inset Index idx
5927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5936 \begin_layout Standard
5937 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5941 list has no fixed label.
5942 Instead, LyX uses the first
5943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5950 of the first line as the label.
5954 \begin_layout Description
5955 Example: This is an example of the
5962 \begin_layout Standard
5963 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5967 \begin_layout Standard
5969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5976 it is meant that the first usage of the
5980 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5982 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
5990 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
5995 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5996 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5998 \begin_inset space ~
6004 \begin_inset space ~
6008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6010 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6014 for more information.) Here is an example:
6017 \begin_layout Description
6019 \begin_inset space ~
6022 Example: This one shows how to use a
6025 \begin_inset space ~
6037 \begin_layout Description
6038 Usage: You should use the
6042 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6043 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6045 It's not a good idea to use a
6049 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6050 You're better off using
6062 paragraphs into them.
6065 \begin_layout Description
6066 Nesting: You can nest
6070 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6074 \begin_layout Standard
6075 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6076 them from the first line.
6079 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6081 \begin_inset Index idx
6084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6093 \begin_layout Standard
6098 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6101 \begin_layout Standard
6110 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6112 Here are its properties:
6115 \begin_layout Labeling
6116 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6118 \begin_inset space ~
6121 labels LyX uses the first
6122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6129 of each line as the item label.
6134 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6135 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6136 space as described above.
6139 \begin_layout Labeling
6140 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6141 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6142 the body of the item text.
6143 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6144 label width plus a little extra space.
6148 \begin_layout Labeling
6149 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6151 \begin_inset space ~
6154 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6156 If the label width is larger, the label
6157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6164 into the first line.
6165 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6166 margin of the rest of the item text.
6169 \begin_layout Labeling
6170 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6172 \begin_inset space ~
6175 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6180 environment has the same left margin.
6181 \begin_inset Newline newline
6184 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6187 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6189 \begin_inset space ~
6194 dialog (toolbar button
6197 arg "layout-paragraph"
6204 \begin_inset space ~
6209 determines the default label width.
6210 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6219 multiple times instead.
6220 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6229 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6232 \begin_inset space ~
6237 every time you alter a label in a
6242 \begin_inset Newline newline
6245 The predefined default width is the length of
6246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6254 \begin_inset space ~
6260 \begin_layout Standard
6265 list the same way as the
6269 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6275 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6279 \begin_layout Standard
6284 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6285 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6287 \begin_inset space ~
6291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6293 reference "sec:Nesting"
6297 to learn about nesting.
6300 \begin_layout Standard
6301 There is yet another feature of the
6305 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6307 You can use additional
6311 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6316 are documented in section
6317 \begin_inset space ~
6321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6323 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6328 Here are some examples:
6331 \begin_layout Labeling
6332 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6333 Left The default for
6340 \begin_layout Labeling
6341 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6342 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6349 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6352 \begin_layout Labeling
6353 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6354 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6358 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6365 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6368 \begin_layout Subsection
6370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6372 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6377 \begin_inset Index idx
6380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6389 \begin_layout Standard
6390 The features described in this section require that the module
6392 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6394 is loaded in the document settings.
6395 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6400 \begin_inset Index idx
6403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6404 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6412 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6413 Custom Enumerate Lists
6414 \begin_inset Index idx
6417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6418 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6426 \begin_layout Standard
6428 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6431 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6434 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6435 There you add the command
6438 \begin_layout Standard
6446 \begin_layout Standard
6447 in TeX Code (shortcut
6457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6458 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6459 \begin_inset space ~
6463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6465 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6478 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6485 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6486 For capital Roman numerals replace
6498 in the command above.
6499 For Arabic numerals use
6507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6514 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6529 \begin_layout Standard
6531 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6539 You can only number 26
6540 \begin_inset space ~
6543 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6551 \begin_layout Standard
6552 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6553 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6556 \begin_layout Standard
6557 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6560 \begin_layout Enumerate
6561 \begin_inset Argument 1
6564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6590 \begin_layout Enumerate
6591 \begin_inset Argument 1
6594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6617 \begin_layout Enumerate
6622 \begin_layout Enumerate
6623 \begin_inset Argument 1
6626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6650 \begin_layout Enumerate
6651 \begin_inset Argument 1
6654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6680 \begin_layout Standard
6681 For this list these commands were used:
6684 \begin_layout Standard
6695 \begin_inset Newline newline
6703 \begin_inset Newline newline
6711 \begin_inset Newline newline
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6728 makes the label emphasized and
6737 \begin_layout Standard
6738 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6746 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6747 lists until you change the definition.
6755 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6757 \begin_inset Index idx
6760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6761 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6769 \begin_layout Standard
6770 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6773 \begin_layout Enumerate
6774 \begin_inset Argument 1
6777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6796 \begin_inset Note Note
6799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6800 goes back to default numbering
6808 \begin_layout Enumerate
6812 \begin_layout Standard
6816 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6820 \begin_layout Standard
6821 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6826 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6827 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6830 \begin_layout Standard
6831 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6839 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6847 \begin_layout Standard
6848 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6850 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6851 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6852 of a normal enumeration.
6853 There, insert the command
6856 \begin_layout Standard
6862 \begin_layout Standard
6867 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6871 \begin_layout Enumerate
6875 \begin_layout Enumerate
6879 \begin_layout Standard
6880 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6883 \begin_layout Enumerate
6884 \begin_inset Argument 1
6887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6903 This enumeration starts at 4
6906 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6908 \begin_inset Index idx
6911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6920 \begin_layout Standard
6921 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6923 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6926 \begin_layout Itemize
6930 \begin_layout Itemize
6931 with standard spacing
6934 \begin_layout Standard
6935 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6937 Add there the command
6941 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6944 \begin_layout Itemize
6945 \begin_inset Argument 1
6948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6967 \begin_layout Itemize
6971 \begin_layout Itemize
6975 \begin_layout Standard
6976 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6982 \begin_inset Index idx
6985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6986 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6992 For more information see its documentation,
6993 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7002 \begin_layout Standard
7003 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7005 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7006 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7010 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7013 \begin_layout Enumerate
7014 \begin_inset Argument 1
7017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7025 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7038 \begin_layout Enumerate
7039 with negative indentation
7042 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7043 Further Customization
7044 \begin_inset Index idx
7047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7048 Lists ! Customization
7056 \begin_layout Standard
7057 You can also change the style of description lists.
7061 \begin_layout Standard
7067 \begin_layout Standard
7068 changes the description label font, the command
7071 \begin_layout Standard
7077 \begin_layout Standard
7078 sets the list style.
7081 \begin_layout Standard
7082 An example where the command
7085 \begin_layout Standard
7090 itshape, style=nextline
7093 \begin_layout Standard
7097 \begin_layout Description
7099 \begin_inset space ~
7103 \begin_inset Argument 1
7106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7112 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7114 itshape, style=nextline
7124 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7125 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7129 \begin_layout Description
7131 \begin_inset space ~
7134 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7135 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7136 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7139 \begin_layout Standard
7140 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7146 \begin_inset Index idx
7149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7150 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7156 For more information see its documentation
7157 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7166 \begin_layout Subsection
7168 \begin_inset Index idx
7171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7180 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7182 \begin_inset space ~
7185 Address: An Overview
7188 \begin_layout Standard
7189 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7197 \begin_inset space ~
7203 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7204 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7205 In contrast, you can use the
7212 \begin_inset space ~
7217 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7218 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7222 \begin_layout Standard
7223 Of course, you're not limited to using
7230 \begin_inset space ~
7239 \begin_inset space ~
7244 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7245 some European academic papers.
7248 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7252 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7259 \begin_layout Standard
7264 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7265 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7269 \begin_inset space ~
7274 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7275 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7276 Here's an example of each:
7279 \begin_layout Right Address
7281 \begin_inset Newline newline
7285 \begin_inset Newline newline
7289 \begin_inset Newline newline
7292 When is it? What is today?
7295 \begin_layout Standard
7299 \begin_inset space ~
7305 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7306 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7307 Here's an example of the
7314 \begin_layout Address
7316 \begin_inset Newline newline
7319 Where do I send this
7320 \begin_inset Newline newline
7323 Your post office and country
7326 \begin_layout Standard
7327 As you can see, both
7334 \begin_inset space ~
7339 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7344 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7350 This makes sense, since
7358 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7359 Thus, you have to use
7366 arg "newline-insert newline"
7371 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7372 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7374 \begin_inset space ~
7378 \begin_inset space ~
7383 ) to start a new line in an
7390 \begin_inset space ~
7398 \begin_layout Subsection
7402 \begin_layout Standard
7403 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7404 or list of references.
7405 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7408 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7410 \begin_inset Index idx
7413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7422 \begin_layout Standard
7427 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7428 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7429 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7430 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7444 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7445 The book document classes ignores the
7449 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7453 in a letter document class.
7456 \begin_layout Standard
7461 environment does several things for you.
7462 First, it puts the centered label
7463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7471 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7473 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7474 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7475 the subsequent text.
7476 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7477 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7481 \begin_layout Standard
7482 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7486 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7487 The new paragraph will still be in the
7492 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7493 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7496 \begin_layout Standard
7497 \begin_inset Float figure
7502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7504 \begin_inset Graphics
7505 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7513 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7518 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7539 \begin_layout Standard
7540 We would love to demonstrate the
7544 environment, but since this document is in the
7545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7552 class, we can't do this.
7553 We inserted it therefore as figure
7554 \begin_inset space ~
7558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7560 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7565 If you have never heard of an
7566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7573 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7576 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7578 \begin_inset Index idx
7581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7590 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7597 \begin_layout Standard
7602 environment is used to list references.
7603 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7604 only use it at the end of the document.
7616 \begin_layout Standard
7617 When you first open a
7621 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7637 depending on the document class.
7638 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7639 Each paragraph of the
7643 environment is a bibliography entry.
7648 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7649 Each new paragraph is still in the
7656 \begin_layout Standard
7657 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7658 by using a BibTeX database.
7659 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7660 phy handling, have a look at section
7661 \begin_inset space ~
7665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7667 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7674 \begin_layout Subsection
7675 Special Environments
7678 \begin_layout Standard
7679 LyX provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of
7680 a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7683 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7687 \begin_inset Index idx
7690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7706 \begin_layout Standard
7711 environment is a LyX extension.
7712 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7717 key as a fixed whitespace.
7721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7733 \begin_inset space ~
7738 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7751 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7753 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7756 arg "newline-insert newline"
7773 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7774 So, when you finish using the
7778 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7779 Also, you can nest the
7783 environment inside of others.
7786 \begin_layout Standard
7787 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7790 \begin_layout Itemize
7794 arg "newline-insert newline"
7797 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7802 \begin_inset space \space{}
7812 arg "newline-insert newline"
7818 \begin_layout Itemize
7822 arg "newline-insert newline"
7832 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7838 \begin_layout Itemize
7839 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7840 You must put at least one
7844 in any line you want blank.
7845 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7848 \begin_layout Itemize
7849 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7853 since that will insert
7858 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7861 arg "self-insert \""
7867 \begin_layout Standard
7871 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7875 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7879 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7883 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7887 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7888 printf("Hello World!
7893 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7897 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7901 \begin_layout Standard
7902 This is just the standard
7903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7914 \begin_layout Standard
7919 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
7921 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7922 as if you used a typewriter.
7923 \begin_inset Index idx
7926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7927 Paragraph environments|)
7932 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7935 Program Code Listings
7940 \begin_inset space ~
7948 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7952 \begin_inset Index idx
7955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7964 \begin_layout Standard
7969 environment is similar to the
7973 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
7974 computer console text.
7979 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
7992 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
7993 you can have empty lines.
8005 \begin_layout Itemize
8006 have a certain language and a text style
8009 \begin_layout Itemize
8010 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8011 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8015 \begin_layout Standard
8016 Because of these properties
8020 works like a typewriter.
8024 \begin_layout Verbatim
8029 \begin_layout Verbatim
8033 The following 2 lines are empty:
8036 \begin_layout Verbatim
8040 \begin_layout Verbatim
8044 \begin_layout Verbatim
8046 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8051 \begin_layout Section
8052 Nesting Environments
8053 \begin_inset Index idx
8056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8057 Nesting ! Environments
8063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8072 \begin_layout Subsection
8076 \begin_layout Standard
8077 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8079 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8081 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8083 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8095 \begin_layout Enumerate
8099 \begin_layout Enumerate
8104 \begin_layout Enumerate
8108 \begin_layout Enumerate
8113 \begin_layout Enumerate
8117 \begin_layout Standard
8118 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8119 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8121 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8123 \begin_inset space ~
8127 \begin_inset space ~
8135 \begin_inset space ~
8139 \begin_inset space ~
8144 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8146 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8149 arg "depth-increment"
8155 arg "depth-decrement"
8169 arg "depth-increment"
8175 arg "depth-decrement"
8179 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8180 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8184 \begin_layout Standard
8185 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8186 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8187 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8188 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8191 \begin_layout Standard
8192 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8193 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8195 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8198 \begin_layout Subsection
8199 What You Can and Can't Nest
8202 \begin_layout Standard
8203 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8204 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8207 \begin_layout Standard
8208 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8209 than a simple yes or no.
8210 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8213 \begin_layout Itemize
8214 Completely unnestable
8217 \begin_layout Itemize
8218 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8222 \begin_layout Itemize
8223 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8227 \begin_layout Standard
8228 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8229 environments have them:
8232 \begin_layout Description
8233 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8234 Can't nest into them.
8238 \begin_layout Itemize
8244 \begin_layout Itemize
8250 \begin_layout Itemize
8256 \begin_layout Itemize
8262 \begin_layout Itemize
8269 \begin_layout Description
8271 \begin_inset space ~
8274 Nestable You can nest them.
8275 You can nest other things into them.
8279 \begin_layout Itemize
8285 \begin_layout Itemize
8291 \begin_layout Itemize
8297 \begin_layout Itemize
8303 \begin_layout Itemize
8309 \begin_layout Itemize
8315 \begin_layout Itemize
8321 \begin_layout Itemize
8327 \begin_layout Itemize
8334 \begin_layout Description
8335 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8336 You can't nest anything into them.
8340 \begin_layout Itemize
8346 \begin_layout Itemize
8352 \begin_layout Itemize
8358 \begin_layout Itemize
8364 \begin_layout Itemize
8370 \begin_layout Itemize
8376 \begin_layout Itemize
8382 \begin_layout Itemize
8388 \begin_layout Itemize
8394 \begin_layout Itemize
8400 \begin_layout Itemize
8406 \begin_layout Itemize
8412 \begin_layout Itemize
8418 \begin_layout Itemize
8422 \begin_inset space ~
8428 \begin_layout Itemize
8435 \begin_layout Standard
8436 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8444 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8454 \begin_inset space ~
8457 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8458 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8459 nested section headings violate this.
8467 \begin_layout Subsection
8468 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8469 \begin_inset Index idx
8472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8473 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8481 \begin_layout Standard
8482 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8483 affected by nesting anyhow.
8487 \begin_layout Itemize
8491 \begin_layout Itemize
8495 \begin_layout Itemize
8499 \begin_layout Standard
8501 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8509 Figures and tables in
8513 are not affected by this.
8518 Have a look at section
8519 \begin_inset space ~
8523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8525 reference "sec:Floats"
8529 for more information about
8536 \begin_layout Standard
8537 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8538 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8542 \begin_layout Standard
8543 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8551 of its own, it behaves just like a
8552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8559 paragraph environment.
8560 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8564 \begin_layout Standard
8565 Here's an example with a table:
8568 \begin_layout Enumerate
8573 \begin_layout Enumerate
8574 This is (a) and it's nested.
8578 \begin_layout Standard
8579 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8585 \begin_layout Standard
8587 \begin_inset Tabular
8588 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8589 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8590 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8591 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8675 \begin_layout Standard
8676 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8683 \begin_layout Enumerate
8685 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8689 \begin_layout Enumerate
8693 \begin_layout Standard
8694 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8697 \begin_layout Enumerate
8702 \begin_layout Enumerate
8703 This is (a) and it's nested.
8707 \begin_layout Standard
8708 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8714 \begin_layout Standard
8716 \begin_inset Tabular
8717 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8718 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8719 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8720 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8804 \begin_layout Standard
8805 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8811 \begin_layout Enumerate
8818 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8821 \begin_layout Enumerate
8825 \begin_layout Standard
8826 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8830 \begin_layout Standard
8831 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8833 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8836 \begin_layout Enumerate
8841 \begin_layout Enumerate
8842 This is (a) and it's nested.
8845 \begin_layout Standard
8846 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8852 \begin_layout Standard
8854 \begin_inset Tabular
8855 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8856 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8857 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8858 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8943 \begin_layout Standard
8944 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8950 \begin_layout Enumerate
8952 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8959 \begin_layout Enumerate
8963 \begin_layout Standard
8964 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8970 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8971 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8975 \begin_layout Subsection
8976 Usage and General Features
8979 \begin_layout Standard
8980 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8989 is the innermost possible depth.
8990 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8993 \begin_layout Enumerate
8994 level #1 – outermost
8998 \begin_layout Enumerate
9003 \begin_layout Enumerate
9008 \begin_layout Enumerate
9013 \begin_layout Itemize
9018 \begin_layout Itemize
9027 \begin_layout Standard
9028 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9029 both of them in the example.
9030 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9040 For example, if we tried to nest another
9045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9052 , we would get errors.
9055 \begin_layout Subsection
9057 \begin_inset Index idx
9060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9069 \begin_layout Standard
9070 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9071 We have several examples of nested environments.
9072 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9076 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9077 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9080 \begin_layout Labeling
9081 \labelwidthstring MMM
9082 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9091 \begin_layout Labeling
9092 \labelwidthstring MMM
9093 #2-a This is level #2.
9094 We created it by using
9097 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9103 arg "depth-increment"
9110 \begin_layout Labeling
9111 \labelwidthstring MMM
9112 #3-a This is level #3.
9113 This time, we just enter
9120 arg "depth-increment"
9124 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9128 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9134 arg "depth-increment"
9141 \begin_layout Standard
9146 environment, nested inside of
9147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9155 So, it's at level #4.
9156 We did this by entering
9159 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9165 arg "depth-increment"
9168 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9173 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9189 \begin_layout Standard
9194 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9197 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9203 \begin_layout Labeling
9204 \labelwidthstring MMM
9205 #4-a This is level #4.
9209 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9212 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9217 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9221 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9226 keep nesting things inside
9227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9238 \begin_layout Labeling
9239 \labelwidthstring MMM
9240 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9245 \begin_layout Labeling
9246 \labelwidthstring MMM
9247 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9248 and this is level #6.
9249 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9253 \begin_layout Labeling
9254 \labelwidthstring MMM
9255 #5-b Back to level #5.
9259 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9265 arg "depth-decrement"
9272 \begin_layout Labeling
9273 \labelwidthstring MMM
9277 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9283 arg "depth-decrement"
9286 , we're back at level #4.
9290 \begin_layout Labeling
9291 \labelwidthstring MMM
9292 #3-b Back to level #3.
9293 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9297 \begin_layout Labeling
9298 \labelwidthstring MMM
9299 #2-b Back to level #2.
9304 \begin_layout Labeling
9305 \labelwidthstring MMM
9306 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9307 After this sentence, we will enter
9311 and change the paragraph environment back to
9318 \begin_layout Standard
9319 We could have also used the
9335 environment in place of the
9340 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9343 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9344 Example 2: Inheritance
9347 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9348 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9351 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9360 arg "depth-increment"
9364 \begin_inset Newline newline
9367 which, we will change to the
9375 \begin_layout Enumerate
9380 environment, at level #2.
9383 \begin_layout Enumerate
9384 Notice how the nested
9388 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9392 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9396 \begin_layout Standard
9397 We ended this example by entering
9402 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9406 and reset the nesting depth by using
9409 arg "depth-decrement"
9415 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9416 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9425 \begin_inset Argument 1
9428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9429 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9437 \begin_layout Enumerate
9438 This is level #1, in an
9442 paragraph environment.
9443 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9447 \begin_layout Enumerate
9452 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9458 arg "depth-increment"
9462 Now, what happens if we nest an
9466 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9467 label be? An asterisk?
9471 \begin_layout Itemize
9481 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9482 So, its label is a bullet.
9483 (We got here by using
9486 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9492 arg "depth-increment"
9495 , then changing the environment to
9503 \begin_layout Itemize
9504 Here's level #4, produced using
9507 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9513 arg "depth-increment"
9517 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9522 \begin_layout Enumerate
9523 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9525 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9530 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9534 , because we are in the
9542 environment (that is, it is an
9557 \begin_layout Enumerate
9562 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9563 type of numbering does LyX use?
9566 \begin_layout Enumerate
9567 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9570 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9573 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9576 \begin_layout Enumerate
9580 arg "depth-decrement"
9583 to decrease the depth after the next
9586 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9593 \begin_layout Enumerate
9595 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9599 \begin_layout Enumerate
9601 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9602 numeral as the label.Why?
9605 \begin_layout Enumerate
9606 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9615 Notice, however, that LyX
9619 reset the counter for the label.
9623 \begin_layout Enumerate
9627 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9633 arg "depth-decrement"
9636 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9637 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9638 into the twofold-nested
9646 \begin_layout Enumerate
9647 The same thing happens if we do another
9650 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9656 arg "depth-decrement"
9659 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9662 \begin_layout Standard
9663 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9668 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9682 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9688 The same rule applies for the
9692 environment, as well.
9695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9696 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9699 \begin_layout Enumerate
9700 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9701 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9702 the same detail with how we did it.
9711 \begin_layout Standard
9719 arg "depth-increment"
9726 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9727 the example in parentheses someplace.
9728 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9729 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9730 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9734 \begin_layout Enumerate
9739 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9744 Now we will add verse.
9745 \begin_inset Newline newline
9748 It will get much worse.
9749 \begin_inset Newline newline
9759 arg "depth-increment"
9770 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9771 \begin_inset Newline newline
9774 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9775 \begin_inset Newline newline
9781 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9794 \begin_layout Standard
9795 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9801 \begin_layout Standard
9803 \begin_inset Tabular
9804 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9805 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9806 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9807 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9896 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9906 arg "depth-increment"
9912 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9918 \begin_inset Newline newline
9926 arg "depth-decrement"
9933 \begin_layout Enumerate
9938 : level #1) This is another item.
9939 Note that selecting a
9943 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9944 3 times to put the table inside the
9952 \begin_layout Quotation
9953 We're now ending the
9957 list and changing to
9962 We're still at level #1.
9963 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9964 The next set of paragraphs is a
9965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9972 We will nest both the
9979 \begin_inset space ~
9984 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9988 for the letter body.
9992 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9995 to preserve the depth.
9996 Remember that you need to use
9999 arg "newline-insert newline"
10002 to create multiple lines inside the
10009 \begin_inset space ~
10019 \begin_layout Right Address
10021 \begin_inset Newline newline
10024 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10025 \begin_inset Newline newline
10031 \begin_layout Address
10033 \begin_inset space ~
10039 \begin_layout Quotation
10040 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10041 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10044 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10045 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10046 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10047 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10048 as soon as possible.
10049 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10052 \begin_layout Quotation
10053 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10054 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10055 with your order, along with payment.
10058 \begin_layout Quotation
10059 We thank you again for your patience.
10062 \begin_layout Address
10064 \begin_inset Newline newline
10071 \begin_layout Quotation
10072 That ends that example!
10075 \begin_layout Standard
10076 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10077 just a few keystrokes.
10078 We could have easily nested an
10099 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10102 \begin_layout Subsection
10104 \begin_inset Index idx
10107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10108 Nesting ! Separation
10114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10116 name "sub:Separate-Nestings"
10123 \begin_layout Standard
10124 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10126 For example you need two different enumerations:
10129 \begin_layout Enumerate
10134 \begin_layout Enumerate
10139 \begin_layout Enumerate
10143 \begin_layout --Separator--
10147 \begin_layout Itemize
10153 \begin_layout --Separator--
10157 \begin_layout Enumerate
10161 \begin_layout Enumerate
10165 \begin_layout Enumerate
10169 \begin_layout Standard
10170 To tell LyX that there are two lists and not one, set the cursor at the
10171 end of the last item and use the menu
10173 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10174 Start New Parent Environment
10177 This adds an environment separator and a new list behind it.
10178 If you use instead the menu
10180 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10181 Start New Environment
10183 a new list will also be created, but in the same nesting level.
10186 \begin_layout Standard
10187 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10191 arg "paragraph-break"
10198 in the pull-down box for environments in LyX's main toolbar.
10201 \begin_layout Section
10202 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10203 \begin_inset Index idx
10206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10215 \begin_layout Standard
10216 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10217 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10218 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10219 be broken at the end of a line.
10220 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10224 \begin_layout Subsection
10226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10228 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10233 \begin_inset Index idx
10236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10245 \begin_layout Standard
10246 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10247 line at that point.
10248 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10251 \begin_layout Quote
10252 Further documentation is given in section
10253 \begin_inset Newline newline
10257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10259 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10267 \begin_layout Standard
10268 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10283 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10292 A protected space is set with
10294 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10295 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10297 \begin_inset space ~
10305 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10311 \begin_layout Subsection
10313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10315 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10320 \begin_inset Index idx
10323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10324 Spacing ! Horizontal
10332 \begin_layout Standard
10333 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10335 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10336 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10340 The length units are listed in Appendix
10341 \begin_inset space ~
10345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10347 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10354 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10358 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10363 \begin_inset Index idx
10366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10367 Spaces ! Inter-word
10375 \begin_layout Standard
10376 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10377 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10378 at the ends of sentences.
10379 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10380 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10381 followed by a period; see section
10382 \begin_inset space ~
10386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10388 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10393 To insert a normal space, select
10395 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10396 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10398 \begin_inset space ~
10406 arg "space-insert normal"
10412 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10416 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10421 \begin_inset Index idx
10424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10433 \begin_layout Standard
10435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10442 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10451 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10452 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10453 inside abbreviations:
10456 \begin_layout Quote
10458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10462 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10465 \begin_layout Standard
10466 or between values and units.
10467 Compare for example this:
10468 \begin_inset Newline newline
10472 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10476 \begin_inset Newline newline
10479 10 kg (normal space
10482 \begin_layout Standard
10483 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10485 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10486 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10488 \begin_inset space ~
10496 arg "space-insert thin"
10502 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10506 \begin_layout Standard
10507 You can also insert the following space types:
10510 \begin_layout Description
10512 \begin_inset space ~
10516 \begin_inset space ~
10519 space A line with a
10520 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10524 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10528 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10531 negative thin space between the arrows.
10534 \begin_layout Description
10536 \begin_inset space ~
10540 \begin_inset space ~
10543 space A line with a
10544 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10548 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10552 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10555 negative medium space between the arrows.
10558 \begin_layout Description
10560 \begin_inset space ~
10564 \begin_inset space ~
10567 space A line with a
10568 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10572 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10576 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10579 negative thick space between the arrows.
10582 \begin_layout Description
10584 \begin_inset space ~
10588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10592 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10596 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10600 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10604 \begin_inset space ~
10608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10611 em) space between the arrows.
10614 \begin_layout Description
10616 \begin_inset space ~
10620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10624 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10628 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10632 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10636 \begin_inset space ~
10640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10643 em) space between the arrows.
10646 \begin_layout Description
10648 \begin_inset space ~
10652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10656 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10660 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10664 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10668 \begin_inset space ~
10672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10675 em) space between the arrows.
10678 \begin_layout Description
10680 \begin_inset space ~
10684 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10688 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10693 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10700 cm space between the arrows.
10703 \begin_layout Standard
10705 \begin_inset space ~
10709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10711 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10715 lists the different space sizes.
10718 \begin_layout Standard
10719 \begin_inset Float table
10724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10725 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10730 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10734 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10744 \begin_inset Tabular
10745 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10746 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10747 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10748 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10860 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10864 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10868 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10892 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11021 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11023 \begin_inset Index idx
11026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11035 \begin_layout Standard
11036 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
11037 in a uniform fashion.
11038 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11039 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11040 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11041 equally between themselves.
11044 \begin_layout Standard
11045 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11048 \begin_layout Quote
11050 This is on the left side
11051 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11054 This is on the right
11057 \begin_layout Quote
11060 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11064 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11070 \begin_layout Quote
11073 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11077 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11081 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11087 \begin_layout Standard
11088 That was an example in the
11094 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11098 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11102 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11105 is one in a standard paragraph.
11106 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11110 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11113 \begin_layout Standard
11114 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11117 \begin_inset space ~
11122 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11125 \begin_layout Standard
11127 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11131 \begin_inset space ~
11137 \begin_layout Standard
11139 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11143 \begin_inset space ~
11149 \begin_layout Standard
11151 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11155 \begin_inset space ~
11161 \begin_layout Standard
11163 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11167 \begin_inset space ~
11173 \begin_layout Standard
11175 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11179 \begin_inset space ~
11185 \begin_layout Standard
11187 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11191 \begin_inset space ~
11197 \begin_layout Standard
11198 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11206 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11210 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
11211 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11212 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11216 option in the space dialog.
11224 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11228 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11233 \begin_inset Index idx
11236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11245 \begin_layout Standard
11246 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11247 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11250 \begin_layout Standard
11251 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11254 What is correct English?:
11255 \begin_inset Newline newline
11259 \begin_inset Newline newline
11263 \begin_inset space ~
11266 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11267 \begin_inset Newline newline
11271 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11282 \begin_inset Newline newline
11286 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11297 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11303 \begin_layout Standard
11305 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11310 \begin_inset space ~
11314 \begin_inset space ~
11318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11322 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11324 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11325 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11329 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11335 \begin_inset space ~
11339 \begin_inset space ~
11343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11346 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11355 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11356 That is why it is named
11357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11365 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11366 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11370 \begin_layout Subsection
11372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11374 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11379 \begin_inset Index idx
11382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11391 \begin_layout Standard
11392 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11394 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11395 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11397 \begin_inset space ~
11403 There you find the following sizes:
11406 \begin_layout Standard
11419 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11424 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11426 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11427 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11429 \begin_inset space ~
11435 \begin_inset Index idx
11438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11439 Document ! Settings
11444 for the paragraph separation.
11445 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11456 \begin_layout Standard
11462 \begin_inset Index idx
11465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11471 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11472 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11477 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11478 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11487 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11496 s are described in section
11497 \begin_inset space ~
11501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11503 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11512 If there are several
11516 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11517 You can therefore use
11521 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11524 \begin_layout Standard
11529 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11530 \begin_inset space ~
11534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11536 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11543 \begin_layout Standard
11544 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11554 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11555 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11567 \begin_layout Subsection
11568 Paragraph Alignment
11569 \begin_inset Index idx
11572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11573 Paragraph ! Alignment
11581 \begin_layout Standard
11582 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11584 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11587 dialog (toolbar button
11590 arg "layout-paragraph"
11594 There are five possibilities:
11597 \begin_layout Itemize
11605 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11611 \begin_layout Itemize
11619 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11625 \begin_layout Itemize
11633 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11639 \begin_layout Itemize
11647 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11653 \begin_layout Itemize
11661 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11667 \begin_layout Standard
11668 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11669 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11670 the left and right margins.
11671 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11674 \begin_layout Standard
11676 This paragraph is right aligned,
11679 \begin_layout Standard
11681 this one is centered,
11684 \begin_layout Standard
11686 this one is left aligned.
11689 \begin_layout Subsection
11691 \begin_inset Index idx
11694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11695 Page breaks ! Forced
11701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11703 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11710 \begin_layout Standard
11711 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11712 can force a page break where you want one.
11713 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11714 Only if you use a lot of
11718 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11721 \begin_layout Standard
11722 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11723 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11727 have to change the page breaking.
11730 \begin_layout Standard
11731 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11733 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11735 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11736 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11738 \begin_inset space ~
11744 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11746 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11747 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11749 \begin_inset space ~
11754 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11756 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11757 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11760 \begin_layout Standard
11761 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11762 at the top of a page.
11763 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11764 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11765 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11766 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11770 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11774 to learn more about
11781 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11785 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11790 \begin_inset Index idx
11793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11794 Page breaks ! Clear
11802 \begin_layout Standard
11803 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11804 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11805 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11806 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11807 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11810 \begin_layout Standard
11811 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11813 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11814 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11816 \begin_inset space ~
11822 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11824 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11825 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11827 \begin_inset space ~
11831 \begin_inset space ~
11836 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11837 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11840 \begin_layout Subsection
11842 \begin_inset Index idx
11845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11854 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11861 \begin_layout Standard
11862 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11864 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11866 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11867 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11869 \begin_inset space ~
11873 \begin_inset space ~
11881 arg "newline-insert newline"
11885 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11887 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11888 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11890 \begin_inset space ~
11894 \begin_inset space ~
11902 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11905 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11907 This is useful to avoid
11908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11915 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11918 \begin_layout Standard
11919 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11920 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11921 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11922 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11923 \begin_inset space ~
11927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11929 reference "sec:Quote"
11934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11936 reference "sec:Verse"
11941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11943 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11950 \begin_layout Subsection
11952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11954 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11959 \begin_inset Index idx
11962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11971 \begin_layout Standard
11973 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11984 \begin_layout Standard
11988 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11989 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11991 \begin_inset space ~
11996 you can insert horizontal lines.
11997 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11998 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11999 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12002 \begin_layout Standard
12004 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12015 \begin_layout Section
12016 Characters and Symbols
12019 \begin_layout Standard
12020 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12021 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12022 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12030 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
12034 for information on how this is done.
12037 \begin_layout Standard
12038 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12043 dialog via the menu
12045 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12046 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12053 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12061 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12062 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
12063 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12071 \begin_layout Section
12072 Fonts and Text Styles
12073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12075 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12082 \begin_layout Subsection
12084 \begin_inset Index idx
12087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12096 \begin_layout Standard
12097 There are two types of fonts:
12100 \begin_layout Description
12102 \begin_inset space ~
12106 \begin_inset Index idx
12109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12115 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12120 characters) in the font.
12121 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12122 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12123 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12124 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12125 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12126 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12127 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12128 \begin_inset Newline newline
12131 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12132 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12133 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12134 sizes than at small ones.
12135 \begin_inset Newline newline
12149 \begin_inset space ~
12157 \begin_layout Description
12159 \begin_inset space ~
12163 \begin_inset Index idx
12166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12172 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12173 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12174 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12175 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12176 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12177 image manipulation program.
12178 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12179 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12180 \begin_inset space ~
12183 pixels high up to 34
12184 \begin_inset space ~
12187 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12188 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12189 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12191 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12192 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12193 \begin_inset Newline newline
12196 Bitmap fonts are named
12199 \begin_inset space ~
12204 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12207 \begin_layout Standard
12208 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12209 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12210 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12211 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12212 use scalable fonts.
12215 \begin_layout Standard
12216 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12219 \begin_layout Standard
12220 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12221 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12222 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12223 font to emphasize text, you use an
12224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12232 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12233 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12237 \begin_layout Subsection
12239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12241 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12248 \begin_layout Standard
12249 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12250 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12251 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12253 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12254 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12255 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12256 to a word processor.
12257 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12258 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12259 across different machines.
12260 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12261 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12263 LyX supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12265 \begin_inset space ~
12269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12271 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12276 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code in the document
12277 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12280 \begin_layout Standard
12281 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12282 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12284 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12285 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12286 that is installed on your system.
12287 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12290 \begin_layout Standard
12291 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12299 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12300 es; so you might have to experiment.
12308 \begin_layout Standard
12309 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12317 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12318 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12326 \begin_layout Subsection
12327 Document Font and Font size
12328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12330 name "sub:Document-Font"
12335 \begin_inset Index idx
12338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12345 \begin_inset Index idx
12348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12357 \begin_layout Standard
12358 You can set the document fonts in the
12360 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12364 \begin_inset Index idx
12367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12368 Document ! Settings
12378 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12379 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12382 \begin_inset space ~
12391 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12393 \begin_inset space ~
12396 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12399 \begin_layout Standard
12406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12415 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12416 This requires that you use
12422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12461 as the output format, i.
12462 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12466 \begin_inset space \space{}
12469 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12470 \begin_inset space ~
12474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12476 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12481 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12482 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12484 \begin_inset space ~
12487 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12488 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12489 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12491 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12494 \begin_layout Standard
12495 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12500 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12505 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12506 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12513 \begin_inset space ~
12519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12532 European Computer Modern
12535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12542 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12545 \begin_layout Standard
12554 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12555 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12560 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12563 \begin_inset space ~
12568 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12574 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12575 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12578 \begin_layout Itemize
12582 \begin_inset space ~
12587 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12600 \begin_inset space ~
12605 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12609 as the default font.
12610 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12611 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12614 \begin_inset space ~
12627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12628 One difference is improved kerning.
12636 \begin_layout Itemize
12640 \begin_inset space ~
12644 \begin_inset space ~
12649 fonts in (the rare) case that
12652 \begin_inset space ~
12657 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12672 Virtual means that it
12673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12684 -glyphs from other fonts.
12685 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12707 Loading the LaTeX-package
12712 \begin_inset Index idx
12715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12716 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12721 with the document preamble line
12722 \begin_inset Newline newline
12729 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12730 \begin_inset Newline newline
12735 will fix the guillemet problem.
12740 and that accented characters are not
12744 glyph, but built of
12748 characters, the accent and the letter.
12749 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12755 If you search for example for the French word
12756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12763 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12772 and not for the glyph
12773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12777 \begin_inset space ~
12781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12787 \begin_layout Itemize
12788 If you do not like the look of
12796 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12801 \begin_inset space ~
12807 \begin_inset space ~
12817 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12818 \begin_inset space ~
12821 serif and typewriter fonts,
12825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12826 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12833 \begin_inset space ~
12842 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12847 \begin_inset space \space{}
12855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12859 \begin_inset space \space{}
12865 \begin_inset space ~
12873 \begin_inset space ~
12883 but you can also select your own.
12884 \begin_inset Newline newline
12887 The differences between roman,
12890 \begin_inset space ~
12899 fonts are explained in section
12900 \begin_inset space ~
12904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12906 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12911 \begin_inset Newline newline
12917 \begin_inset space ~
12922 was originally designed for newspapers.
12923 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12924 into the small newspaper columns.
12928 \begin_inset space ~
12933 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12936 \begin_layout Standard
12937 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12950 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12955 depends on the class you are using.
12956 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12959 \begin_layout Standard
12960 Note that the font size is the
12965 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12966 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12967 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12970 \begin_inset space ~
12976 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12977 \begin_inset space ~
12981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12983 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12990 \begin_layout Standard
12994 \begin_inset space ~
12999 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13001 \begin_inset space ~
13004 serif or typewriter.
13009 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13019 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13022 \begin_layout Standard
13031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13040 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13046 \begin_inset Index idx
13049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13050 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
13056 \begin_inset space ~
13060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13062 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
13067 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13068 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13075 \begin_layout Standard
13076 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13078 Use Old Style Figures
13082 Use True Small Caps
13085 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13088 Use Old Style Figures
13090 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13092 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13100 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13104 Use True Small Caps
13106 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13107 of scaled capitals.
13108 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13109 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13112 \begin_layout Standard
13117 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13118 a font to display the script characters.
13122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13123 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
13128 \begin_inset Index idx
13131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13132 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
13137 So this has no effect for the document language
13151 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13163 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
13167 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13168 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13169 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13171 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13174 dialog, see section
13175 \begin_inset space ~
13179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13181 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
13193 \begin_layout Subsection
13197 \begin_layout Standard
13198 In LaTeX the font used for characters in equations is different from the
13200 For the case that you use TeX fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13201 choose a math font in the dialog
13203 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13207 \begin_inset Index idx
13210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13211 Document ! Settings
13217 The default setting is that LyX automatically selects a math font.
13218 For most cases this will be LaTeX's default -- the math variant of LaTeX's
13219 default font family
13220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13226 \begin_inset space ~
13232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13236 LyX will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of
13237 the document font is available.
13240 \begin_layout Standard
13241 Note that the math font will not be used for
13245 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13251 or by the insertion of the command
13258 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13259 \begin_inset space ~
13263 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13264 while the math characters do not.
13266 \begin_inset space ~
13269 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13272 \begin_inset space ~
13280 \begin_inset space ~
13285 in the document font settings.
13288 \begin_layout Standard
13289 If you use non-TeX fonts for the document, you can only choose for math
13290 to use either the document's class default TeX font (in most cases
13291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13297 \begin_inset space ~
13303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13306 ) or to use the non-TeX variant of the document's class default font (in
13308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13314 \begin_inset space ~
13320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13326 \begin_layout Subsection
13327 Using Different Character Styles
13328 \begin_inset Index idx
13331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13338 \begin_inset Index idx
13341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13350 \begin_layout Standard
13351 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13352 certain paragraph environments.
13353 LyX supports two character styles,
13362 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13366 \begin_layout Standard
13371 style, do one of the following:
13374 \begin_layout Itemize
13375 click on the toolbar button
13384 \begin_layout Itemize
13385 use the key binding
13394 \begin_layout Standard
13395 These commands are all toggles.
13400 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13403 \begin_layout Standard
13404 One typically uses the
13408 style for proper names.
13410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13417 is the original author of LyX.
13418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13424 \begin_layout Standard
13425 A more widely used character style is the
13430 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13437 \begin_layout Itemize
13438 clicking on the toolbar button
13447 \begin_layout Itemize
13448 using the keybindings
13457 \begin_layout Standard
13462 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13463 es use a different font.
13466 \begin_layout Standard
13467 We've been using the
13471 style all over the place in this document.
13472 Here's one more example:
13475 \begin_layout Quotation
13478 Do not overuse character styles!
13481 \begin_layout Standard
13482 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13483 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13484 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13485 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13489 \begin_layout Standard
13490 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13498 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13500 \begin_inset space ~
13503 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13509 arg "dialog-show character"
13515 \begin_layout Subsection
13516 Fine-Tuning with the
13521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13523 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13528 \begin_inset Index idx
13531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13540 \begin_layout Standard
13541 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13542 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13543 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13544 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13545 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13546 from ordinary dialog.
13549 \begin_layout Standard
13550 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13551 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13552 \begin_inset Newline newline
13555 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13556 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13559 \begin_layout Standard
13560 To use custom character styles, open the
13562 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13564 \begin_inset space ~
13567 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13570 dialog or press the toolbar button
13573 arg "dialog-show character"
13577 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13578 font property that you can choose.
13579 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13582 \begin_inset space ~
13587 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13592 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13593 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13594 environments all at once.
13597 \begin_layout Standard
13598 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13601 \begin_inset space ~
13613 \begin_layout Labeling
13614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13628 The possible options are:
13632 \begin_layout Labeling
13633 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13638 This is the Roman font family.
13639 Normally a serif font.
13640 It's also the default family.
13650 \begin_layout Labeling
13651 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13655 \begin_inset space ~
13662 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13674 \begin_layout Labeling
13675 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13682 This is the Typewriter font family.
13688 arg "font-typewriter"
13697 \begin_layout Labeling
13698 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13703 This corresponds to the print weight.
13708 \begin_layout Labeling
13709 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13714 This is the Medium font series.
13715 It's also the default series.
13718 \begin_layout Labeling
13719 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13726 This is the Bold font series.
13739 \begin_layout Labeling
13740 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13745 As the name implies.
13750 \begin_layout Labeling
13751 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13756 This is the Upright font shape.
13757 It's also the default shape.
13760 \begin_layout Labeling
13761 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13775 s the Italic font shape
13781 \begin_layout Labeling
13782 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13789 This is the Slanted font shape
13791 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13794 \begin_layout Labeling
13795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13799 \begin_inset space ~
13806 This is the Small caps font shape
13813 \begin_layout Labeling
13814 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13819 Alters the text color.
13820 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13824 \begin_inset space ~
13829 , which means that the document default color set in
13831 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13832 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13838 \begin_inset space ~
13843 is used, you can choose between
13876 \begin_inset Index idx
13879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13888 \begin_layout Labeling
13889 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13894 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13895 the language of the document.
13896 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13898 \begin_inset Newline newline
13901 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13902 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13903 When using the spell checking (see section
13904 \begin_inset space ~
13908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13910 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13914 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13917 \begin_layout Labeling
13918 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13923 Alters the size of the font.
13924 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13925 proportional to the document font size.
13926 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13927 what you want to do.
13932 \begin_layout Labeling
13933 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13954 arg "font-size tiny"
13960 \begin_layout Labeling
13961 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13982 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13988 \begin_layout Labeling
13989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14010 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14016 \begin_layout Labeling
14017 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14038 arg "font-size small"
14044 \begin_layout Labeling
14045 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14059 It's also the default size.
14063 arg "font-size normal"
14069 \begin_layout Labeling
14070 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14091 arg "font-size large"
14097 \begin_layout Labeling
14098 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14119 arg "font-size larger"
14125 \begin_layout Labeling
14126 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14147 arg "font-size largest"
14153 \begin_layout Labeling
14154 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14175 arg "font-size huge"
14181 \begin_layout Labeling
14182 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14203 arg "font-size giant"
14209 \begin_layout Labeling
14210 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14215 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14235 arg "font-size increase"
14241 \begin_layout Labeling
14242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14247 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14267 arg "font-size decrease"
14274 \begin_layout Standard
14279 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14280 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14281 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14282 — use those instead.
14283 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14286 \begin_layout Labeling
14287 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14292 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14297 \begin_layout Labeling
14298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14305 This is text with emphasize on
14308 This might seem like the same as
14312 , but it is actually a bit different.
14318 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14320 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14323 \begin_layout Labeling
14324 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14331 This is text with Underbar on.
14337 arg "font-underline"
14343 \begin_inset Newline newline
14348 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14349 when you could not change fonts.
14350 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14351 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14355 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14358 \begin_layout Labeling
14359 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14363 \begin_inset space ~
14370 This is text with Double underbar on.
14376 arg "font-underunderline"
14380 \begin_inset Newline newline
14383 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14384 about double underbar.
14387 \begin_layout Labeling
14388 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14392 \begin_inset space ~
14399 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14405 arg "font-underwave"
14409 \begin_inset Newline newline
14412 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14413 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14416 \begin_layout Labeling
14417 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14424 This is text with Strikeout on.
14430 arg "font-strikeout"
14434 \begin_inset Newline newline
14437 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14438 changed in the meantime.
14441 \begin_layout Labeling
14442 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14449 This is text with Noun on.
14456 , this is a logical attribute.
14457 Normally it's equivalent to
14460 \begin_inset space ~
14469 \begin_layout Standard
14470 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14471 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14473 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14475 \begin_inset space ~
14478 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14484 arg "dialog-show character"
14487 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14488 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14491 arg "textstyle-apply"
14495 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14499 \begin_layout Standard
14500 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14507 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14508 (suppose you just set the shape to
14509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14527 \begin_inset space ~
14539 \begin_layout Standard
14540 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14548 \begin_inset space ~
14560 \begin_layout Itemize
14566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14573 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14591 \begin_inset Newline newline
14595 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14609 \begin_inset Note Note
14612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14613 For more on phantoms see section
14614 \begin_inset space ~
14618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14620 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14630 \begin_inset Newline newline
14636 \begin_layout Itemize
14641 fonts use characters with serifs.
14642 These are the small
14643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14650 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14651 The following example shows the difference:
14652 \begin_inset Newline newline
14656 \begin_inset Newline newline
14661 text without serifs
14664 \begin_inset Newline newline
14667 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14668 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14675 \begin_layout Itemize
14680 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14681 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14682 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14685 \begin_layout Standard
14686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14693 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14694 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14697 \begin_inset space ~
14702 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14703 the property to be removed.
14704 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14705 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14706 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14724 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14725 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14733 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14737 \begin_inset space ~
14742 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14753 If you, for example, set
14754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14772 \begin_inset space ~
14777 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14786 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14789 \begin_layout Standard
14790 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14791 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14794 \begin_layout Section
14795 Printing and Previewing
14798 \begin_layout Subsection
14802 \begin_layout Standard
14803 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14804 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14805 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14806 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14807 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14809 Additional Features
14814 \begin_layout Standard
14815 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14816 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14817 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14818 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14819 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14820 This happens in two stages:
14823 \begin_layout Enumerate
14824 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14825 generating a file with the extension,
14826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14840 \begin_layout Enumerate
14841 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14845 file to produce printable output.
14848 \begin_layout Subsection
14849 Output file formats
14850 \begin_inset Index idx
14853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14862 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14869 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14870 Simple text (ASCII)
14871 \begin_inset Index idx
14874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14875 File formats ! ASCII
14883 \begin_layout Standard
14884 This file type has the extension
14885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14897 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14901 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14908 \begin_layout Standard
14909 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14911 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14912 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14914 \begin_inset space ~
14920 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14921 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14922 \begin_inset space ~
14926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14928 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14933 If your document includes such material, use
14935 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14936 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14938 \begin_inset space ~
14942 \begin_inset space ~
14946 \begin_inset space ~
14954 \begin_inset space ~
14958 \begin_inset space ~
14964 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14965 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14968 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14970 \begin_inset Index idx
14973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14974 File formats ! LaTeX
14982 \begin_layout Standard
14983 This file type has the extension
14984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14995 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14997 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14998 it manually with console commands.
14999 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
15000 you view or export your document.
15003 \begin_layout Standard
15004 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
15006 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15007 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15022 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
15023 \begin_inset space ~
15027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15029 reference "sub:Export"
15036 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15038 \begin_inset Index idx
15041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15050 \begin_layout Standard
15051 This file type has the extension
15052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15072 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15073 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15074 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15078 \begin_layout Standard
15079 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15080 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15081 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15082 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15083 when you view the DVI.
15084 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15087 \begin_layout Standard
15088 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15090 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15091 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15096 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15097 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15099 \begin_inset space ~
15106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15116 The latter option uses the program
15125 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15126 font access (see section
15127 \begin_inset space ~
15131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15133 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15138 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15139 standard TeX processor.
15142 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15144 \begin_inset Index idx
15147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15148 File formats ! PostScript
15156 \begin_layout Standard
15157 This file type has the extension
15158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15170 PostScript was developed by the company
15174 as a printer language.
15175 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15177 PostScript can be seen as a
15178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15181 programming language
15182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15185 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15190 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
15196 \begin_inset Index idx
15199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15200 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
15210 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15213 \begin_layout Standard
15214 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15218 Encapsulated PostScript
15219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15222 (EPS, file extension
15223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15235 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
15236 to convert them in the background to EPS.
15237 If, for example, you have 50
15238 \begin_inset space ~
15241 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
15242 \begin_inset space ~
15245 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15246 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
15247 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15248 EPS to avoid this problem.
15251 \begin_layout Standard
15252 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15254 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15255 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15263 \begin_inset Index idx
15266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15273 \begin_inset Index idx
15276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15285 \begin_layout Standard
15286 This file type has the extension
15287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15303 Portable Document Format
15304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15311 was derived from PostScript.
15312 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15321 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15322 looks exactly the same.
15325 \begin_layout Standard
15326 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15330 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15334 (JPG, file extension
15335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15362 Portable Network Graphics
15363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15366 (PNG, file extension
15367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15379 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15380 background to one of these formats.
15381 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15382 will slow down your workflow.
15383 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15386 \begin_layout Standard
15387 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15389 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15395 \begin_layout Description
15397 \begin_inset space ~
15400 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15404 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15407 \begin_layout Description
15409 \begin_inset space ~
15416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15423 X) This uses the program
15427 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15432 is a new engine, derived from
15436 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15437 access (see section
15438 \begin_inset space ~
15442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15444 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15449 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15450 standard TeX processor.
15453 \begin_layout Description
15455 \begin_inset space ~
15462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15469 X) This uses the program
15473 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15478 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15479 font access (see section
15480 \begin_inset space ~
15484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15486 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15491 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15492 vertically written Japanese.
15495 \begin_layout Description
15497 \begin_inset space ~
15500 (cropped) This is the same as
15503 \begin_inset space ~
15508 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15509 This is for example useful if you want to use LyX to generate good-looking
15510 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15513 \begin_layout Description
15515 \begin_inset space ~
15518 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15522 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15526 \begin_layout Description
15528 \begin_inset space ~
15531 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15535 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15536 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15540 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15541 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15544 \begin_layout Standard
15548 \begin_inset space ~
15557 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15558 works without problems.
15559 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15560 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15564 \begin_inset space ~
15571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15583 \begin_inset space ~
15590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15599 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15607 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15609 \begin_inset Index idx
15612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15613 FileFormats ! XHTML
15619 \begin_inset Index idx
15622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15631 \begin_layout Standard
15632 This file type has the extension
15633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15645 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15646 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15647 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15648 suitable for the purpose.
15649 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15651 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15652 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15655 between different formats, which are described in section
15657 Math Output in XHTML
15662 \begin_inset space ~
15670 \begin_layout Standard
15671 XHTML output remains
15672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15679 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15682 LyX and the World Wide Web
15686 Additional Features
15688 manual, for more information.
15691 \begin_layout Standard
15692 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15694 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15695 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15701 \begin_layout Subsection
15703 \begin_inset Index idx
15706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15715 \begin_layout Standard
15716 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15717 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15726 or use the toolbar button
15733 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15734 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15735 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15741 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15745 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15753 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15758 Further output formats can be selected via
15760 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15761 View (Other Formats)
15763 or the toolbar button
15764 \begin_inset Graphics
15765 filename ../images/view-others.png
15767 groupId toolbarbuttons
15774 \begin_layout Standard
15775 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15776 viewer window using the menu
15778 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15783 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15784 Update (Other Formats)
15789 \begin_layout Standard
15790 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15792 To have a real output, export your document.
15795 \begin_layout Subsection
15796 Printing the File from within LyX
15797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15799 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15806 \begin_layout Standard
15807 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15808 it directly from within LyX.
15809 To print a file, select the menu
15811 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15817 arg "dialog-show print"
15820 ) or click on the toolbar button
15823 arg "dialog-show print"
15827 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15828 This file is then processed by the program
15832 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15837 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15840 \begin_layout Standard
15841 You can set the following print parameters in the
15844 \begin_inset space ~
15852 \begin_layout Labeling
15853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15858 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15863 Note that this printer name is for the program
15872 has to be configured for this printer name.
15873 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15874 \begin_inset space ~
15878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15880 reference "sub:Printer"
15889 The printer should understand PostScript.
15892 \begin_layout Labeling
15893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15898 The name of a file to print to.
15899 The output will be a PostScript file.
15900 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15904 \begin_layout Standard
15905 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15906 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15907 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15908 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15909 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15910 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15911 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15914 \begin_layout Section
15915 A few Words about Typography
15916 \begin_inset Index idx
15919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15928 \begin_layout Subsection
15929 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15930 \begin_inset Index idx
15933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15940 \begin_inset Index idx
15943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15952 \begin_layout Standard
15954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15965 character comes in four lengths: the
15977 , and the minus sign:
15978 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15984 \begin_layout Standard
15985 \begin_inset Tabular
15986 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15987 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15988 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15989 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15990 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15991 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16020 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16060 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16085 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16087 \begin_inset space ~
16090 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16097 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16122 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16124 \begin_inset space ~
16127 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16148 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16182 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16188 \begin_layout Standard
16189 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16201 character multiple times in a row.
16202 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16203 the final output, but not in LyX.
16205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16235 \begin_layout Standard
16236 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16237 math mode and has a length of its own.
16238 Here are some examples:
16241 \begin_layout Enumerate
16242 line- and page-breaks
16243 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16253 \begin_layout Enumerate
16255 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16265 \begin_layout Enumerate
16266 Oh — there's a dash.
16267 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16277 \begin_layout Enumerate
16278 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16282 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16292 \begin_layout Subsection
16294 \begin_inset Index idx
16297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16306 name "sub:Hyphenation"
16313 \begin_layout Standard
16314 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
16315 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
16320 \begin_inset Index idx
16323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16324 LaTeX-packages ! babel
16329 following the rules of the document language.
16332 \begin_layout Standard
16333 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16338 font and with unusual constructs, like
16339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16347 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16349 This is done with the menu
16351 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16352 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16354 \begin_inset space ~
16360 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16361 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16364 \begin_layout Standard
16365 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16366 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16376 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16384 as a hyphenation possibility.
16385 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16386 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16387 as described in section
16388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16391 Prevent Hyphenation
16392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16398 \begin_inset space ~
16406 \begin_layout Subsection
16408 \begin_inset Index idx
16411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16420 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16421 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16424 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16431 \begin_layout Standard
16432 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16433 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16434 LaTeX then adds the
16435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16438 appropriate amount of space.
16439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16442 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16444 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16445 gets after another word.
16448 \begin_layout Standard
16449 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16450 not work in all cases.
16452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16463 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16464 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16467 \begin_layout Standard
16468 Here are some examples of
16472 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16475 \begin_layout Itemize
16480 \begin_layout Itemize
16485 \begin_layout Standard
16486 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16489 \begin_layout Itemize
16491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16495 this is too much space!
16498 \begin_layout Itemize
16503 \begin_layout Standard
16504 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16507 \begin_layout Standard
16508 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16511 \begin_layout Enumerate
16515 \begin_inset space ~
16520 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16521 \begin_inset space ~
16525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16527 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16532 \begin_inset Index idx
16535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16536 Spaces ! inter-word
16544 \begin_layout Enumerate
16548 \begin_inset space ~
16553 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16554 \begin_inset space ~
16558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16560 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16565 \begin_inset Index idx
16568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16577 \begin_layout Enumerate
16581 \begin_inset space ~
16585 \begin_inset space ~
16589 \begin_inset space ~
16596 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16598 \begin_inset space ~
16603 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16604 This function is also bound to
16607 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16613 \begin_layout Standard
16614 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16617 \begin_layout Itemize
16619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16623 \begin_inset space \space{}
16626 this is too much space!
16629 \begin_layout Itemize
16630 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16634 \begin_layout Standard
16635 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16636 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16637 will take care of this.
16640 \begin_layout Standard
16641 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16645 \begin_inset space ~
16650 feature described in the section
16656 Additional Features
16661 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16663 \begin_inset Index idx
16666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16667 Typography ! Quotes
16673 \begin_inset Index idx
16676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16707 \begin_layout Standard
16708 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16709 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16710 and use a closing quote at the end.
16712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16720 The keyboard character,
16724 , generates this automatically.
16727 \begin_layout Standard
16728 You can specify what character the
16732 key produces using the submenu
16738 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16742 \begin_inset Index idx
16745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16746 Document ! Settings
16756 There are six choices:
16759 \begin_layout Labeling
16760 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16783 \begin_layout Labeling
16784 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16787 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16791 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16797 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16801 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16807 \begin_layout Labeling
16808 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16811 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16815 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16821 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16825 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16831 \begin_layout Labeling
16832 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16835 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16839 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16845 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16849 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16855 \begin_layout Labeling
16856 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16859 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16863 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16869 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16873 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16879 \begin_layout Labeling
16880 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16883 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16887 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16893 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16897 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16903 \begin_layout Standard
16904 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16907 arg "quote-insert single"
16913 \begin_layout Subsection
16915 \begin_inset Index idx
16918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16919 Typography ! Ligatures
16925 \begin_inset Index idx
16928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16959 name "sub:Ligatures"
16966 \begin_layout Standard
16967 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16968 print them as single characters.
16969 These groups are known as
16974 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16976 Here are the standard ligatures:
16979 \begin_layout Itemize
16983 \begin_layout Itemize
16987 \begin_layout Itemize
16991 \begin_layout Itemize
16995 \begin_layout Itemize
16999 \begin_layout Standard
17000 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17003 \begin_layout Standard
17004 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17005 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17013 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17029 To break a ligature, use
17031 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17032 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17034 \begin_inset space ~
17041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17052 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17069 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17077 \begin_layout Subsection
17079 \begin_inset Index idx
17082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17091 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17098 \begin_layout Standard
17099 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
17100 characters in different sizes and positions.
17101 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
17102 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
17103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17122 \begin_inset Note Note
17125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17126 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
17127 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17132 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
17133 following proper names:
17136 \begin_layout Description
17137 LyX The name of the game, write
17138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17159 \begin_layout Description
17160 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
17161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17182 \begin_layout Description
17183 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
17184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17205 \begin_layout Description
17206 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
17207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17228 \begin_layout Standard
17229 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
17230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17234 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17242 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
17243 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
17244 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17247 : The actual version is
17248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17255 , the previous one was
17256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17266 \begin_layout Standard
17267 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17268 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
17269 In LyX this will look like
17270 \begin_inset Graphics
17271 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17277 \begin_inset Newline newline
17280 For more about TeX Code, see section
17281 \begin_inset space ~
17285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17287 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17294 \begin_layout Subsection
17296 \begin_inset Index idx
17299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17308 \begin_layout Standard
17309 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17310 space between two words.
17311 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17321 for units use the menu
17323 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17324 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17326 \begin_inset space ~
17334 arg "space-insert thin"
17340 \begin_layout Standard
17341 Here is an example to show the differences:
17344 \begin_layout Standard
17345 \begin_inset Tabular
17346 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17347 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17348 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17349 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17356 \begin_inset space ~
17360 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17372 space between number and unit
17379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17388 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17400 half space between number and unit
17413 \begin_layout Subsection
17415 \begin_inset Index idx
17418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17419 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17427 \begin_layout Standard
17428 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17430 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17431 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17432 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17433 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17434 These bits of text became known as
17445 \begin_layout Standard
17446 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17447 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17448 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17449 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17450 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17451 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17452 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17453 \begin_inset Newline newline
17461 \begin_inset Newline newline
17469 \begin_inset Newline newline
17472 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17473 Some LaTeX books (such as
17474 \begin_inset space ~
17478 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17480 key "latexcompanion"
17485 \begin_inset space ~
17489 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17495 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17499 \begin_layout Chapter
17500 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17503 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17510 \begin_layout Standard
17511 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17514 \begin_inset space ~
17520 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17523 \begin_layout Section
17525 \begin_inset Index idx
17528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17535 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17544 \begin_layout Standard
17545 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17548 \begin_layout Description
17550 \begin_inset space ~
17553 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17554 \begin_inset Newline newline
17558 \begin_inset Note Note
17561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17562 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17570 \begin_layout Description
17571 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17572 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17574 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17575 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17588 \begin_inset space ~
17594 \begin_inset Newline newline
17598 \begin_inset Note Comment
17601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17602 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17610 \begin_layout Description
17612 \begin_inset space ~
17615 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17616 set in the document settings under
17618 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17620 \begin_inset space ~
17626 \begin_inset Newline newline
17630 \begin_inset Newline newline
17634 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17643 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17644 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17649 of a comment that appears in the output.
17655 \begin_inset Newline newline
17659 \begin_inset Newline newline
17662 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17665 \begin_layout Standard
17666 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17674 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17678 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17681 \begin_layout Section
17683 \begin_inset Index idx
17686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17695 name "sec:Footnotes"
17702 \begin_layout Standard
17703 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17706 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17709 or the toolbar button
17712 arg "footnote-insert"
17724 \begin_inset Graphics
17725 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17734 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17763 label, the box will
17767 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17768 Clicking on the box label again will close
17781 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17782 and click on the footnote
17797 \begin_layout Standard
17798 Here is an example footnote:
17806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17807 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17815 \begin_layout Standard
17816 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17817 position where the footnote box is placed.
17818 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17819 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17820 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17821 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17826 ey are described in the
17829 \begin_inset space ~
17837 \begin_layout Section
17839 \begin_inset Index idx
17842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17849 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17851 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17858 \begin_layout Standard
17859 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17860 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17862 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17864 \begin_inset space ~
17869 or the toolbar button
17872 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17898 appearing within your text.
17899 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17908 \begin_layout Standard
17909 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17913 \begin_inset Marginal
17916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17918 This is a marginal note.
17926 \begin_layout Standard
17927 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17928 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17929 pages, right on odd pages.
17932 \begin_layout Standard
17933 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17936 \begin_inset space ~
17944 \begin_inset space ~
17952 \begin_layout Section
17953 Graphics and Images
17954 \begin_inset Index idx
17957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17964 \begin_inset Index idx
17967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17974 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17976 name "sec:Graphics"
17983 \begin_layout Standard
17984 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17985 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17988 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17993 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17997 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18000 \begin_layout Standard
18001 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18006 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18007 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18009 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18010 \begin_inset space ~
18014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18016 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18023 \begin_layout Standard
18028 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18029 of the image in the output.
18030 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18034 \begin_inset space ~
18038 \begin_inset space ~
18047 \begin_inset space ~
18051 \begin_inset space ~
18055 \begin_inset space ~
18060 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18061 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18069 \begin_layout Standard
18076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18084 \begin_inset space ~
18088 \begin_inset space ~
18095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18104 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
18105 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
18109 \begin_inset space ~
18114 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18115 with the image size is printed.
18119 \begin_inset space ~
18123 \begin_inset space ~
18127 \begin_inset space ~
18132 is explained in the
18135 \begin_inset space ~
18147 \begin_layout Standard
18148 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18149 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18151 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18154 \begin_layout Standard
18156 \begin_inset Graphics
18157 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18165 \begin_layout Standard
18166 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18167 the image into a float, see section
18168 \begin_inset space ~
18172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18174 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
18181 \begin_layout Subsection
18183 \begin_inset Index idx
18186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18195 name "sub:Image-Formats"
18202 \begin_layout Standard
18203 You can insert images in any known file format.
18204 But as we explained in section
18205 \begin_inset space ~
18209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18211 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18215 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18216 LyX therefore uses the program
18220 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18221 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18222 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18223 \begin_inset space ~
18227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18229 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18236 \begin_layout Standard
18237 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18240 \begin_layout Description
18242 \begin_inset space ~
18245 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18246 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18247 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18251 Graphics Interchange Format
18252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18255 (GIF, file extension
18256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18268 \begin_inset Index idx
18271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18303 Portable Network Graphics
18304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18307 (PNG, file extension
18308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18320 \begin_inset Index idx
18323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18355 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18359 (JPG, file extension
18360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18384 \begin_inset Index idx
18387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18418 \begin_layout Description
18420 \begin_inset space ~
18423 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18425 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18426 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18427 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18428 \begin_inset Newline newline
18431 Scalable image formats can be
18432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18435 Scalable Vector Graphics
18436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18439 (SVG, file extension
18440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18452 \begin_inset Index idx
18455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18487 Encapsulated PostScript
18488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18491 (EPS, file extension
18492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18504 \begin_inset Index idx
18507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18539 Portable Document Format
18540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18543 (PDF, file extension
18544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18556 \begin_inset Index idx
18559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18574 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18575 result will not be scalable.
18576 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18582 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18590 \begin_layout Standard
18591 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18598 \begin_layout Subsection
18599 Grouping of Image Settings
18600 \begin_inset Index idx
18603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18604 Images ! Settings grouping
18612 \begin_layout Standard
18613 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18615 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18616 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18618 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18619 need to manually change each of them.
18623 \begin_layout Standard
18624 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18627 \begin_inset space ~
18631 \begin_inset space ~
18646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18654 \begin_inset space ~
18658 \begin_inset space ~
18665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18675 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18676 and checking the name of the desired group.
18679 \begin_layout Section
18681 \begin_inset Index idx
18684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18700 \begin_layout Standard
18701 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18704 arg "tabular-insert"
18709 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18713 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18714 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18715 from the rest of the table.
18716 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18717 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18719 Here is an example table:
18722 \begin_layout Standard
18724 \begin_inset Tabular
18725 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18726 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18727 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18728 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18729 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18730 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18930 \begin_layout Subsection
18934 \begin_layout Standard
18935 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18938 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18942 This brings up the table dialog.
18943 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18944 cursor is placed currently.
18945 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18946 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18947 done on all of your selection.
18950 \begin_layout Standard
18951 In addition to the table dialog, the
18954 \begin_inset space ~
18959 helps you in setting table properties.
18960 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18963 \begin_layout Standard
18967 \begin_inset space ~
18972 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18973 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18974 current cell respectively.
18975 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18977 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18978 of text, see section
18979 \begin_inset space ~
18983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18985 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18992 \begin_layout Standard
18993 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18994 using the check box
19003 This will merge the cells to
19007 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19008 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19009 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19010 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19011 in the last row without the upper border:
19014 \begin_layout Standard
19016 \begin_inset Tabular
19017 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19018 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19019 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19020 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19021 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19022 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19033 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19042 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19118 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19153 \begin_layout Standard
19154 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
19155 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19156 explained in the chapter
19163 \begin_inset space ~
19169 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19170 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
19173 \begin_layout Standard
19174 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19182 Most DVI-viewers are
19186 able to display rotations.
19194 \begin_layout Standard
19199 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19204 adds lines for all cell borders.
19207 \begin_layout Subsection
19209 \begin_inset Index idx
19212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19213 Tables ! Longtables
19219 \begin_inset Index idx
19222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19231 \begin_layout Standard
19232 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19235 \begin_inset space ~
19239 \begin_inset space ~
19248 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19249 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19252 \begin_layout Description
19257 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19258 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19259 except for the first page, if
19262 \begin_inset space ~
19270 \begin_layout Description
19274 \begin_inset space ~
19279 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19280 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19283 \begin_layout Description
19288 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19289 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19290 except for the last page, if
19293 \begin_inset space ~
19301 \begin_layout Description
19305 \begin_inset space ~
19310 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19311 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19314 \begin_layout Description
19315 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19316 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19318 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
19322 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19325 \begin_inset space ~
19333 \begin_layout Standard
19334 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19335 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19336 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19342 In this context, first means first in this order:
19345 \begin_inset space ~
19357 \begin_inset space ~
19362 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19365 \begin_layout Standard
19367 \begin_inset Tabular
19368 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19369 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19370 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19371 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19372 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19373 <row endfirsthead="true">
19374 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19380 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19385 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19394 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19404 <row endfirsthead="true">
19405 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19416 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19425 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19437 <row endhead="true">
19438 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19449 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19458 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19468 <row endhead="true">
19469 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19480 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19489 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19501 <row endfoot="true">
19502 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19513 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19522 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19553 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20494 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20503 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20512 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20523 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20554 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20585 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20616 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20647 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20709 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20740 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20771 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20802 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20833 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20864 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20895 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20926 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20957 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20988 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21019 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21050 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21081 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21112 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21143 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21174 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21205 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21236 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21267 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21298 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21329 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21360 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21391 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21422 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21453 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21483 <row endlastfoot="true">
21484 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21495 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21504 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21521 \begin_layout Subsection
21523 \begin_inset Index idx
21526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21535 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21542 \begin_layout Standard
21543 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21544 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21545 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21546 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21550 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21553 \begin_layout Standard
21554 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21555 for the column in the table dialog.
21556 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21557 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21561 \begin_layout Standard
21563 \begin_inset Tabular
21564 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21565 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21566 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21567 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21568 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21588 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21657 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21713 This is longer now.
21718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21769 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21770 This is longer now.
21775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21801 \begin_layout Standard
21802 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21803 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21808 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21809 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21815 Selection with the mouse or with
21819 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21820 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21821 the selection from outside the table.
21824 \begin_layout Section
21826 \begin_inset Index idx
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21845 \begin_layout Subsection
21849 \begin_layout Standard
21850 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21851 have a fixed location.
21853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21860 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21868 \begin_inset space ~
21873 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21874 too many notes on the current page.
21877 \begin_layout Standard
21878 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21879 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21880 and pages without text.
21881 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21882 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21883 Floats are therefore numbered.
21884 Referencing is described in section
21885 \begin_inset space ~
21889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21891 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21898 \begin_layout Standard
21899 To insert a float, use the menu
21901 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21905 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21906 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21908 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21909 \begin_inset Index idx
21912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21918 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21919 paragraph within the float.
21920 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21921 by left-clicking on the box label.
21922 A closed float box looks like this:
21923 \begin_inset Graphics
21924 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21929 – a gray button with a red label.
21932 \begin_layout Standard
21933 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21934 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21937 \begin_layout Subsection
21939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21941 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21946 \begin_inset Index idx
21949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 Floats ! Figure floats
21958 \begin_layout Standard
21960 \begin_inset space ~
21964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21966 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21970 was created using the menu
21972 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21973 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21979 arg "float-insert figure"
21983 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21986 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21992 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21996 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21997 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21999 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22001 \begin_inset space ~
22009 arg "layout-paragraph"
22015 \begin_layout Standard
22016 \begin_inset Float figure
22021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22023 \begin_inset Graphics
22024 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22034 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22039 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22043 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22056 \begin_layout Standard
22057 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22058 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22060 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22069 ) and refer to it using the menu
22071 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22077 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22081 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22082 vague references like
22083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22090 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
22092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22100 For more about cross-references, see section
22101 \begin_inset space ~
22105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22107 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22114 \begin_layout Standard
22115 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22116 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22117 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22118 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22119 as described in section
22120 \begin_inset space ~
22124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22126 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
22132 \begin_inset space ~
22136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22138 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22142 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22143 You can also set the images one below the other.
22145 \begin_inset space ~
22149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22151 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22158 reference "fig:Platypus"
22162 are the subfigures.
22165 \begin_layout Standard
22166 \begin_inset Float figure
22171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22172 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22176 \begin_inset Float figure
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22182 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22187 name "fig:Undefinable"
22199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22200 \begin_inset Graphics
22201 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22212 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22216 \begin_inset Float figure
22221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22222 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22227 name "fig:Platypus"
22239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 \begin_inset Graphics
22241 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22253 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22265 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22269 Two distorted images.
22282 \begin_layout Subsection
22284 \begin_inset Index idx
22287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22288 Floats ! Table floats
22296 \begin_layout Standard
22297 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22299 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22300 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22303 or the toolbar button
22306 arg "float-insert table"
22310 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22311 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22312 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22314 \begin_inset space ~
22318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22320 reference "tab:Table-float"
22327 \begin_layout Standard
22328 \begin_inset Float table
22333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22334 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22339 name "tab:Table-float"
22351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 \begin_inset Tabular
22354 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22355 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22356 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22357 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22358 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22485 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22506 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22509 \end{array}\right]$
22517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22530 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22551 \begin_layout Subsection
22553 \begin_inset Index idx
22556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22565 \begin_layout Standard
22566 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22567 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22568 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22570 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22578 \begin_inset space ~
22586 \begin_layout Section
22588 \begin_inset Index idx
22591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22600 \begin_layout Standard
22601 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22603 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22604 \begin_inset space \space{}
22611 \begin_layout Standard
22612 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22614 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22618 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22619 and its alignment within the page.
22622 \begin_layout Standard
22624 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22634 height_special "totalheight"
22637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22640 This is a minipage.
22641 The text is set in an italic style.
22644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22647 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22648 another formatting.
22656 \begin_layout Standard
22657 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22660 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22664 as described in section
22665 \begin_inset space ~
22669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22671 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22676 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22682 \begin_layout Standard
22683 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22693 height_special "totalheight"
22696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22697 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22698 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22704 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22708 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22718 height_special "totalheight"
22721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22722 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22723 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22731 \begin_layout Standard
22732 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22738 \begin_layout Standard
22739 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22741 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22748 \begin_inset space ~
22756 \begin_layout Chapter
22757 Mathematical Formulas
22758 \begin_inset Index idx
22761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22768 \begin_inset Index idx
22771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22802 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22809 \begin_layout Standard
22810 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22815 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22818 \begin_layout Section
22820 \begin_inset Index idx
22823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22832 \begin_layout Standard
22833 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22846 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22848 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22849 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22850 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22852 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22858 \begin_layout Standard
22859 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22863 \begin_inset space ~
22868 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22871 \begin_layout Standard
22872 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22873 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22876 \begin_layout Standard
22877 This is a line with an inline formula
22878 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22884 \begin_layout Standard
22885 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22886 paragraph, like this one:
22887 \begin_inset Formula
22894 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22897 \begin_layout Standard
22898 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22899 For example, typing
22900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22913 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22914 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22918 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22921 \begin_inset space ~
22929 \begin_layout Subsection
22930 Navigating in Formulas
22931 \begin_inset Index idx
22934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22943 \begin_layout Standard
22944 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22945 achieved with the arrow keys.
22946 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22947 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22952 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22953 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22957 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22961 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22964 \end{array}\right]$
22972 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22977 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22978 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22981 \begin_layout Standard
22986 , printed in this document as
22987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22991 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22998 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22999 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23000 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23005 For example, if you want
23006 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23014 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23024 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23028 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23033 , since in the latter case only the
23036 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23041 will be under the square root sign:
23042 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23048 \begin_layout Standard
23049 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23051 \begin_inset Formula
23053 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23062 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23063 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23066 \begin_layout Subsection
23070 \begin_layout Standard
23071 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23072 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23076 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23077 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23078 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23079 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23080 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
23083 \begin_layout Subsection
23084 Exponents and Subscripts
23085 \begin_inset Index idx
23088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23095 \begin_inset Index idx
23098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23107 \begin_layout Standard
23108 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23111 arg "math-superscript"
23117 arg "math-subscript"
23120 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23122 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23125 , type in a formula
23128 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23138 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23144 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23148 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23154 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23160 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23169 , you have to use an extra
23173 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23174 For example, if you want
23175 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23181 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23187 Subscripts are similar: To get
23188 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23194 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23202 \begin_layout Subsection
23204 \begin_inset Index idx
23207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23216 \begin_layout Standard
23217 Create a fraction either with the command
23223 or by using the icon
23226 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23232 \begin_inset space ~
23238 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23239 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23240 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23245 To move back up, press
23250 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23251 \begin_inset Formula
23253 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23256 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23264 \begin_layout Subsection
23266 \begin_inset Index idx
23269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23278 \begin_layout Standard
23279 Roots can be created using the
23282 \begin_inset space ~
23290 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23296 arg "math-insert \\root"
23318 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23324 always produces a square root.
23327 \begin_layout Subsection
23328 Operators with Limits
23329 \begin_inset Index idx
23332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23339 \begin_inset Index idx
23342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23351 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23358 \begin_layout Standard
23360 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23364 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23367 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23368 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23369 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23370 The sum operator will automatically place its
23371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23378 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23380 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23384 \begin_inset Formula
23386 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23391 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23395 \begin_layout Standard
23396 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23398 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23399 behind the operator and using the menu
23401 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23402 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23404 \begin_inset space ~
23408 \begin_inset space ~
23422 \begin_layout Standard
23423 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23432 \begin_inset Index idx
23435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23442 \begin_inset Formula
23444 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23449 which will place the
23450 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23462 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23463 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23469 \begin_layout Standard
23470 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23477 Have a look at section
23478 \begin_inset space ~
23482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23484 reference "sub:Functions"
23488 for an explanation of function macros.
23491 \begin_layout Subsection
23493 \begin_inset Index idx
23496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23505 \begin_layout Standard
23506 Most math symbols can be found in the
23509 \begin_inset space ~
23514 under one of several categories; including
23531 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23535 \begin_layout Standard
23536 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23537 you don't have to use the
23540 \begin_inset space ~
23545 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23546 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23549 \begin_layout Subsection
23551 \begin_inset Index idx
23554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23563 \begin_layout Standard
23564 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23569 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23575 \begin_inset space ~
23583 arg "math-insert \\space"
23587 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23588 For example, the sequence
23593 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23597 \begin_inset Graphics
23598 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23603 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23604 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23605 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23606 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23608 Here are two examples:
23611 \begin_layout Standard
23621 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23627 \begin_layout Standard
23637 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23643 \begin_layout Subsection
23645 \begin_inset Index idx
23648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23657 name "sub:Functions"
23664 \begin_layout Standard
23668 \begin_inset space ~
23673 contains under the button
23676 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23679 a number of function macros, such as
23680 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23684 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23692 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23699 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23700 avoid confusions, because
23701 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23705 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23711 \begin_layout Standard
23712 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23714 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23718 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23724 \begin_layout Standard
23725 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23726 are placed, as described in section
23727 \begin_inset space ~
23731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23733 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23740 \begin_layout Subsection
23742 \begin_inset Index idx
23745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23754 \begin_layout Standard
23755 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23757 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23758 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23759 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23762 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23763 Our example is entered by typing
23768 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23775 \begin_inset space ~
23779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23781 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23785 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23788 \begin_layout Standard
23789 \begin_inset Float table
23794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23795 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23800 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23804 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23814 \begin_inset Tabular
23815 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23816 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23903 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23957 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24011 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24065 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24119 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24173 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24227 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24281 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24335 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24380 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24401 \begin_layout Standard
24402 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24405 \begin_inset space ~
24413 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24416 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24420 \begin_layout Section
24421 Brackets and Delimiters
24422 \begin_inset Index idx
24425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24432 \begin_inset Index idx
24435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24444 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24451 \begin_layout Standard
24452 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24453 For some purposes, using just the keys
24458 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24459 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24460 toolbar delimiter icon
24463 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24467 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24468 \begin_inset Formula
24470 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24478 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24479 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24483 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24486 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24492 \begin_inset Formula
24494 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24502 \begin_layout Standard
24503 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24504 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24508 \begin_layout Standard
24509 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24510 left side and right side.
24511 If you use the option
24514 \begin_inset space ~
24519 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24520 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24521 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24526 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24529 \begin_layout Standard
24530 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24531 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24532 is to go inside the brackets.
24533 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24538 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24539 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24540 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24544 arg "math-delim ( )"
24550 \begin_layout Section
24551 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24552 \begin_inset Index idx
24555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24562 \begin_inset Index idx
24565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24572 \begin_inset Index idx
24575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24576 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24584 \begin_layout Standard
24585 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24588 \begin_inset space ~
24596 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24600 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24601 Here is an example:
24602 \begin_inset Formula
24604 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24613 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24614 \begin_inset space ~
24618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24620 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24625 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24626 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24627 This alignment is set in the box
24632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24680 for every column as default.
24681 For example, the sequence
24682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24693 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24694 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24695 corresponds to the relevant column.
24696 The result will look like this:
24697 \begin_inset Formula
24700 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24701 column & has & has\,right\\
24702 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24711 \begin_layout Standard
24712 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24715 arg "newline-insert newline"
24718 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24719 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24721 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24724 or the math toolbar.
24727 \begin_layout Standard
24728 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24729 It can be created with the menu
24731 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24732 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24734 \begin_inset space ~
24746 Here is an example:
24747 \begin_inset Formula
24761 \begin_layout Standard
24762 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24765 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24768 arg "newline-insert newline"
24772 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24777 arg "newline-insert newline"
24780 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24788 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24789 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24790 A new row is created by every further entry of
24793 arg "newline-insert newline"
24797 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24798 Here is an example:
24799 \begin_inset Formula
24801 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24802 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24807 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24808 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24809 \begin_inset Formula
24811 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24819 \begin_layout Standard
24820 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24827 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24828 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24831 reference "eq:asquared"
24836 The other types are described in section
24837 \begin_inset space ~
24841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24843 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24850 \begin_layout Section
24851 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24852 \begin_inset Index idx
24855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24856 Math ! Formula numbering
24862 \begin_inset Index idx
24865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24866 Math ! Referencing formulas
24872 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24874 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24881 \begin_layout Standard
24882 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24884 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24885 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24887 \begin_inset space ~
24891 \begin_inset space ~
24899 arg "math-number-toggle"
24903 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24904 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24905 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24906 the document class.
24907 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24908 separated by a dot:
24909 \begin_inset Formula
24919 arg "math-number-toggle"
24922 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24923 You can only number displayed formulas.
24926 \begin_layout Standard
24927 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24929 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24930 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24932 \begin_inset space ~
24936 \begin_inset space ~
24944 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24947 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24948 \begin_inset Formula
24951 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24957 To number all lines use the shortcut
24960 arg "math-number-toggle"
24966 \begin_layout Standard
24967 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24970 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24971 A label is inserted with the menu
24973 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24982 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24983 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24984 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24996 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24997 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24998 We inserted in the following example the label
24999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25006 in the second line:
25007 \begin_inset Formula
25009 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25010 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25015 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25016 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25017 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25019 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25021 \begin_inset space ~
25029 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25033 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25034 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25035 as the formula number:
25038 \begin_layout Standard
25039 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25042 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25049 \begin_layout Standard
25050 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
25051 \begin_inset space ~
25055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25057 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25062 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25070 \begin_layout Section
25071 User defined math macros
25072 \begin_inset Index idx
25075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25084 \begin_layout Standard
25085 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25086 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25087 Math macros are explained in section
25090 \begin_inset space ~
25102 \begin_layout Section
25106 \begin_layout Subsection
25108 \begin_inset Index idx
25111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25120 \begin_layout Standard
25121 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25122 To set a font in a formula, use the
25125 \begin_inset space ~
25133 arg "math-insert \\font"
25136 , or enter its command, listed in table
25137 \begin_inset space ~
25141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25143 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25150 \begin_layout Standard
25151 \begin_inset Float table
25156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25157 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25162 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25166 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25176 \begin_inset Tabular
25177 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25178 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
25179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25212 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25239 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25266 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25299 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25326 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25353 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25387 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25414 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25448 \begin_layout Standard
25449 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25457 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25473 \begin_layout Standard
25474 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25475 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25480 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25481 space when you need a space in the box.
25482 Here is an example where
25483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25494 denotes the set of numbers:
25495 \begin_inset Formula
25497 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25505 \begin_layout Standard
25506 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25507 You can, for example, put a character in
25516 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25520 \begin_inset Newline newline
25523 So it is better not to use this feature.
25526 \begin_layout Standard
25527 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25528 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25532 \begin_inset Newline newline
25535 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25541 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25542 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25548 \begin_layout Standard
25555 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25558 \begin_layout Standard
25559 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25561 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25562 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25564 \begin_inset space ~
25572 \begin_layout Subsection
25574 \begin_inset Index idx
25577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25586 \begin_layout Standard
25587 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25589 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25593 \begin_inset space ~
25597 \begin_inset space ~
25605 \begin_inset space ~
25613 arg "math-insert \\font"
25617 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25618 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25619 Here is an example:
25620 \begin_inset Formula
25623 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25624 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25633 \begin_layout Subsection
25635 \begin_inset Index idx
25638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25647 \begin_layout Standard
25648 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25649 automatically chosen in most situations.
25667 For most characters,
25675 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25676 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25681 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25682 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25684 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25687 arg "math-insert \\style"
25691 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25692 For example, you can set
25693 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25696 , which is normally in
25705 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25709 The four styles are used in the following example:
25712 \begin_layout Standard
25713 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25717 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25721 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25725 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25731 \begin_layout Standard
25732 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25733 is set in a particular size with the menu
25735 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25737 \begin_inset space ~
25742 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25743 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25744 will be adjusted to correspond.
25745 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25756 \begin_layout Standard
25760 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25766 \begin_layout Section
25768 \begin_inset Index idx
25771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25778 \begin_inset Index idx
25781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25790 \begin_layout Standard
25791 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25792 (AMS) that are in common use.
25795 \begin_layout Subsection
25796 Enabling AMS-Support
25799 \begin_layout Standard
25800 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25801 the document by selecting the checkbox
25804 \begin_inset space ~
25808 \begin_inset space ~
25812 \begin_inset space ~
25819 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25823 \begin_inset Index idx
25826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25827 Document ! Settings
25835 \begin_inset space ~
25841 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25842 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25845 \begin_layout Subsection
25847 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25849 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25854 \begin_inset Index idx
25857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25858 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25866 \begin_layout Standard
25867 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25868 LyX allows you to choose between
25889 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25890 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25896 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25899 \begin_layout Chapter
25903 \begin_layout Section
25905 \begin_inset Index idx
25908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25917 name "sec:Cross-References"
25924 \begin_layout Standard
25925 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25926 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25928 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25929 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25930 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25933 \begin_layout Enumerate
25937 \begin_layout Enumerate
25938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25940 name "enu:Second-item"
25947 \begin_layout Enumerate
25951 \begin_layout Standard
25952 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25954 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25957 or by pressing the toolbar button
25964 A gray label box like this:
25965 \begin_inset Graphics
25966 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25971 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25972 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26007 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26008 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26024 \begin_layout Standard
26025 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26027 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26030 or the toolbar button
26033 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26037 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26038 \begin_inset Graphics
26039 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26044 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26046 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26059 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26063 \begin_layout Standard
26064 As an alternative to
26066 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26069 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26074 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26075 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26077 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26089 \begin_layout Standard
26090 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26091 \begin_inset space ~
26095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26097 reference "enu:Second-item"
26104 \begin_layout Standard
26105 It is recommended to use a protected space
26109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26110 described in section
26111 \begin_inset space ~
26115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26117 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
26126 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26127 line breaks between them.
26130 \begin_layout Standard
26131 There are six formats of cross-references:
26134 \begin_layout Description
26135 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26138 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26145 \begin_layout Description
26146 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26147 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26159 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26166 \begin_layout Description
26167 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26168 \begin_inset space ~
26172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26173 LatexCommand pageref
26174 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26181 \begin_layout Description
26183 \begin_inset space ~
26187 \begin_inset space ~
26190 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26192 LatexCommand vpageref
26193 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26198 \begin_inset Newline newline
26201 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26202 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26203 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26204 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26205 it prints “on the next page”.
26206 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26209 \begin_layout Description
26211 \begin_inset space ~
26215 \begin_inset space ~
26219 \begin_inset space ~
26222 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26225 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26230 \begin_inset Newline newline
26233 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26239 ; otherwise it behaves like
26243 \begin_inset space ~
26247 \begin_inset space ~
26256 \begin_layout Description
26258 \begin_inset space ~
26261 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26262 \begin_inset Newline newline
26266 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26274 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
26283 \begin_inset Index idx
26286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26287 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
26293 \begin_inset Index idx
26296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26297 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
26308 \begin_inset Newline newline
26311 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
26314 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26318 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26319 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26327 is the default and preferred because
26331 supports only English documents.
26332 The format is specified by using the command
26344 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26345 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26358 ) can be done with this command
26359 \begin_inset Newline newline
26366 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26371 \begin_inset Newline newline
26374 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26376 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26378 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26385 \begin_layout Description
26387 \begin_inset space ~
26390 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26392 LatexCommand nameref
26393 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26400 \begin_layout Standard
26401 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26402 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26403 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26407 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26411 \begin_layout Standard
26412 You can only use the style
26416 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26420 is always possible.
26423 \begin_layout Standard
26424 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26425 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26427 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26428 \begin_inset space ~
26432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26434 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26441 \begin_layout Standard
26442 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26446 \begin_inset space ~
26450 \begin_inset space ~
26455 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26456 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26459 \begin_inset space ~
26464 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26465 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26468 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26474 \begin_layout Standard
26475 You can change labels at any time.
26476 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26477 do not need to think about this.
26480 \begin_layout Standard
26481 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26482 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26483 instead of the reference.
26486 \begin_layout Standard
26487 References are described in detail in the section
26488 \begin_inset space ~
26492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26502 \begin_inset space ~
26510 \begin_layout Section
26511 Table of Contents and other Listings
26512 \begin_inset Index idx
26515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26522 \begin_inset Index idx
26525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26541 \begin_layout Subsection
26543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26545 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26552 \begin_layout Standard
26553 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26555 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26556 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26558 \begin_inset space ~
26562 \begin_inset space ~
26568 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26569 If you click on it, the
26573 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26574 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26575 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26577 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26579 \begin_inset space ~
26584 that is described in section
26585 \begin_inset space ~
26589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26591 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26598 \begin_layout Standard
26599 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26600 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26602 \begin_inset space ~
26606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26608 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26612 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26614 \begin_inset space ~
26618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26620 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26624 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26626 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26629 \begin_layout Subsection
26630 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26633 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26640 \begin_layout Standard
26641 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26643 You can insert them via the
26645 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26649 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26652 \begin_layout Section
26653 URLs and Hyperlinks
26654 \begin_inset Index idx
26657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26664 \begin_inset Index idx
26667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26676 \begin_layout Subsection
26678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26687 \begin_layout Standard
26688 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26690 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26696 \begin_layout Standard
26697 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26698 \begin_inset Flex URL
26701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26711 \begin_layout Standard
26712 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26718 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26722 \begin_layout Standard
26723 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26731 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26739 \begin_layout Subsection
26741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26743 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26750 \begin_layout Standard
26751 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26753 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26756 or with the toolbar button
26763 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26772 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26773 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26774 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26776 name "LyX's homepage"
26777 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26781 , an Email address like this:
26782 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26784 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26785 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26790 , or a link to a file.
26793 \begin_layout Standard
26794 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26807 to the link target.
26810 \begin_layout Standard
26811 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26812 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26813 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26814 the text style dialog.
26815 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26819 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26821 name "LyX's homepage"
26822 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26829 \begin_layout Standard
26830 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26834 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26836 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26837 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26841 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26843 \begin_inset Newline newline
26851 \begin_inset Newline newline
26858 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26861 \begin_layout Section
26863 \begin_inset Index idx
26866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26875 name "sec:Appendices"
26882 \begin_layout Standard
26883 Appendices are created with the menu
26885 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26887 \begin_inset space ~
26891 \begin_inset space ~
26897 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26898 as the appendix part of the book.
26899 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26902 \begin_layout Standard
26903 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26904 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26905 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26906 and the subsection number.
26907 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26911 \begin_layout Standard
26913 \begin_inset space ~
26917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26919 reference "chap:Credits"
26924 \begin_inset space ~
26928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26930 reference "sub:Export"
26937 \begin_layout Section
26939 \begin_inset Index idx
26942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26951 name "sec:Bibliography"
26958 \begin_layout Standard
26959 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26960 You can include a bibliography database,
26964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26965 Known under the name
26966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26978 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26979 manually, using the paragraph environment
26983 , which was described in section
26984 \begin_inset space ~
26988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26990 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26995 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26996 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27000 use a bibliography database.
27003 \begin_layout Subsection
27004 The Bibliography Environment
27007 \begin_layout Standard
27012 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27014 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27023 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27025 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
27027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27034 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27037 \begin_layout Standard
27038 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27040 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27043 or the toolbar button
27046 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27050 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27051 containing the available citations.
27052 Select one or more keys from the list and
27062 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27063 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27067 \begin_layout Standard
27068 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27069 entry with surrounding brackets.
27074 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27075 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27087 \begin_layout Standard
27090 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
27093 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27095 key "latexcompanion"
27102 \begin_layout Standard
27103 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
27104 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27113 \begin_layout Standard
27114 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27117 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27119 \begin_inset space ~
27127 arg "layout-paragraph"
27131 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27134 \begin_layout Subsection
27135 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
27136 \begin_inset Index idx
27139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27140 Bibliography ! Databases
27146 \begin_inset Index idx
27149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27150 Bibliography ! BibTeX
27156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27158 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
27165 \begin_layout Standard
27166 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27172 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27174 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27175 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27180 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27182 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27183 your working field in a database.
27184 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27185 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27186 list for that document.
27187 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27191 \begin_layout Standard
27192 The database is a text file with the file extension
27193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27204 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27205 The format is explained in
27206 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27212 and in the LaTeX books (
27213 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27215 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27220 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27221 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27222 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
27223 \begin_inset Flex URL
27226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27228 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27236 \begin_layout Standard
27237 To use a database, use the menu
27239 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27244 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27257 \begin_inset space ~
27263 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27264 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27271 Add bibliography to TOC
27273 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27278 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27279 in the document or just the cited references.
27282 \begin_layout Standard
27283 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27295 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27296 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27297 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27299 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27305 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27306 \begin_inset Newline newline
27310 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27312 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27324 \begin_layout Standard
27325 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27328 \begin_layout Standard
27329 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
27330 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
27336 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27337 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27342 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27343 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27344 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27359 The following variants are possible:
27362 \begin_layout Description
27363 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27364 with other bibliography packages (e.
27365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27369 \begin_inset space \space{}
27376 ), only with the package
27380 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27384 \begin_layout Description
27385 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27386 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27387 with all bibliography packages, except
27392 \begin_layout Description
27393 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27398 , works with all bibliography packages
27401 \begin_layout Standard
27402 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27404 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27410 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27419 \begin_layout Standard
27420 When you select the option
27422 Sectioned bibliography
27426 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27427 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27430 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27431 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27433 Customizing Bibliographies
27441 Additional Features
27446 \begin_layout Standard
27447 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27448 the two methods of creating them.
27449 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27450 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27451 We used the style file
27455 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27458 \begin_layout Subsection
27459 Bibliography layout
27460 \begin_inset Index idx
27463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27464 Bibliography ! Layout
27472 \begin_layout Standard
27473 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27474 For this feature you need to enable the option
27480 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27484 \begin_inset Index idx
27487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27488 Document ! Settings
27498 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27499 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27500 in the previous section.
27503 \begin_layout Standard
27504 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27505 the citation reference window.
27506 Here is an example where the text
27507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27511 \begin_inset space ~
27515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27518 appears after the reference:
27521 \begin_layout Standard
27523 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27526 key "latexcompanion"
27533 \begin_layout Section
27535 \begin_inset Index idx
27538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27554 \begin_layout Standard
27555 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27557 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27559 \begin_inset space ~
27564 or the toolbar button
27571 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27572 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27573 by LyX as the index entry.
27576 \begin_layout Standard
27577 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27579 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27580 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27582 \begin_inset space ~
27588 A light blue box labeled
27589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27600 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27601 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27604 \begin_layout Standard
27605 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27606 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27608 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27610 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27617 \begin_layout Subsection
27618 Grouping Index Entries
27619 \begin_inset Index idx
27622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27631 \begin_layout Standard
27632 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27634 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27635 lists under the entry
27636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27644 First we create the entry
27645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27653 \begin_inset space ~
27657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27659 reference "sub:Lists"
27664 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27665 \begin_inset space ~
27669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27671 reference "sec:Itemize"
27675 , we insert the command
27678 \begin_layout Standard
27684 \begin_layout Standard
27688 \begin_layout Standard
27694 \begin_layout Standard
27695 for the enumerated list in section
27696 \begin_inset space ~
27700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27702 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27709 \begin_layout Standard
27710 The exclamation mark
27711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27718 marks the grouping levels.
27719 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27720 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27721 If we don't have an index entry for
27722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27729 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27732 \begin_layout Subsection
27734 \begin_inset Index idx
27737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27738 Index ! Page ranges
27746 \begin_layout Standard
27747 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27749 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27750 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27751 an index entry in section
27752 \begin_inset space ~
27756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27758 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27765 \begin_layout Standard
27768 Paragraph environments|(
27771 \begin_layout Standard
27772 and another entry at the end of section
27773 \begin_inset space ~
27777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27779 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27786 \begin_layout Standard
27789 Paragraph environments|)
27792 \begin_layout Standard
27794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27817 respectively start and end the index range.
27818 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27819 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27820 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27821 An example is the index entry
27822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27825 Document ! Settings
27826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27832 \begin_layout Subsection
27834 \begin_inset Index idx
27837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27838 Index ! Cross referencing
27846 \begin_layout Standard
27847 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27848 We referred for example in the index entry
27849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27857 \begin_inset space ~
27861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27863 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27867 ) to the index entry
27868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27875 in the same section using the entry
27878 \begin_layout Standard
27881 GIF|see{Image formats}
27884 \begin_layout Standard
27885 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27886 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27887 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27890 \begin_layout Subsection
27892 \begin_inset Index idx
27895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27896 Index ! Entry order
27904 \begin_layout Standard
27905 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27906 follow the rules for the index order.
27907 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27912 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27914 \begin_inset space ~
27918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27920 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27929 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27930 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27955 \begin_inset Index idx
27958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27959 Dummy entries ! maïs
27965 \begin_inset Index idx
27968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27969 Dummy entries ! maître
27975 \begin_inset Index idx
27978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27979 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27984 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27985 maïs, maison, maître.
27986 To achieve this, we use the command
27989 \begin_layout Standard
27992 previous entry@current entry
27995 \begin_layout Standard
27996 In our case we want to have
27997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28012 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28015 \begin_layout Standard
28021 \begin_layout Standard
28022 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28023 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
28024 See the next subsection for an example.
28027 \begin_layout Standard
28028 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28034 \begin_layout Standard
28035 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28040 to generate the index (see sec.
28041 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28047 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28056 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
28058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28064 reference "sub:Document-Font"
28068 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
28069 index commands start with
28070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28082 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28087 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28090 \begin_layout Standard
28102 \begin_layout Standard
28114 \begin_layout Subsection
28116 \begin_inset Index idx
28119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28120 Index ! Entry layout
28128 \begin_layout Standard
28129 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28130 \begin_inset Index idx
28133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28136 This is an italic dummy entry
28141 You can also format the page number using the character
28142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28149 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
28150 We can write for example
28153 \begin_layout Standard
28156 italic page number:|textit
28159 \begin_layout Standard
28160 to get the page number in italic.
28161 \begin_inset Index idx
28164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28165 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28170 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
28172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28188 \begin_inset space ~
28194 Have a look at section
28195 \begin_inset space ~
28199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28201 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28205 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
28208 \begin_layout Standard
28209 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28217 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28221 to generate the index, see sec.
28222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28228 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28237 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28242 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28243 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28246 key "latexcompanion"
28258 \begin_layout Standard
28259 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28261 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28262 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28263 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28264 If so, put the following in the preamble
28267 \begin_layout Standard
28279 \begin_layout Standard
28283 \begin_layout Standard
28289 \begin_layout Standard
28290 in the index entry.
28291 \begin_inset Index idx
28294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28295 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28300 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28301 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28302 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28305 \begin_layout Standard
28306 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28307 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28308 a bold font for all index entries.
28309 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28321 documentation for details,
28322 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28324 key "makeindex,xindy"
28331 \begin_layout Subsection
28333 \begin_inset Index idx
28336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28345 name "sub:Index-Program"
28352 \begin_layout Standard
28353 If the index generation program
28357 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28361 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28370 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28371 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28372 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28373 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28374 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28384 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28385 dialog, see section
28386 \begin_inset space ~
28390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28392 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28397 The available options are listed and explained in
28398 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28400 key "makeindex,xindy"
28405 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28409 \begin_layout Standard
28410 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28411 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28414 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28415 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28419 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28420 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28423 \begin_layout Subsection
28427 \begin_layout Standard
28428 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28429 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28437 next to the standard index.
28438 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28439 that add this feature.
28445 \begin_inset Index idx
28448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28449 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28454 package to generate multiple indexes.
28455 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28460 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28461 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28468 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28469 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28470 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28478 \begin_layout Standard
28479 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28481 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28482 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28485 and select the option
28487 Use multiple Indexes
28494 already contains the standard index
28495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28503 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28504 also appear as a heading) to the
28508 input field and press the
28513 The new index now also appears in the list.
28514 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28518 \begin_layout Standard
28519 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28522 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28529 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28530 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28531 are additional features:
28534 \begin_layout Itemize
28535 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28536 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28539 \begin_layout Itemize
28540 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28541 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28549 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28550 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28551 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28552 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28555 \begin_layout Section
28556 Nomenclature/Glossary
28557 \begin_inset Index idx
28560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28567 \begin_inset Index idx
28570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28601 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28608 \begin_layout Standard
28609 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28610 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28611 called nomenclature or glossary.
28614 \begin_layout Standard
28615 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28621 \begin_inset Index idx
28624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28625 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28631 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28632 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28638 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28641 \begin_layout Standard
28642 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28643 and then use the menu
28645 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28651 \begin_inset space ~
28656 or the toolbar button
28659 arg "nomencl-insert"
28664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28675 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28678 \begin_layout Standard
28679 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28680 The first is the term or
28684 that you wish to define.
28689 of the term or symbol.
28692 \begin_layout Standard
28693 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28701 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28709 \begin_layout Subsection
28710 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28711 \begin_inset Index idx
28714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28715 Nomenclature ! Layout
28723 \begin_layout Standard
28724 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28728 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28734 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28742 \begin_inset Newline newline
28750 \begin_inset Newline newline
28756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28763 character starts/ends the formula.
28764 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28776 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28786 \begin_layout Standard
28787 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28788 \begin_inset space ~
28792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28794 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28801 \begin_layout Standard
28805 \begin_inset space ~
28810 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28811 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28816 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28823 in this document is:
28824 \begin_inset Newline newline
28829 dummy entry for the character
28834 \begin_inset Newline newline
28846 \begin_inset space ~
28856 font use the command
28885 \begin_layout Standard
28886 If the characters |
28887 \begin_inset space \space{}
28891 \begin_inset space \space{}
28895 \begin_inset space \space{}
28899 \begin_inset space \space{}
28903 \begin_inset space \space{}
28906 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28907 a quote character in front of them.
28908 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28909 LatexCommand nomenclature
28910 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28911 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28918 \begin_layout Subsection
28919 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28920 \begin_inset Index idx
28923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28924 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28932 \begin_layout Standard
28933 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28934 the symbol definition.
28935 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28937 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28940 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28941 LatexCommand nomenclature
28943 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28950 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28954 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28955 LatexCommand nomenclature
28958 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28963 They will be sorted by
28964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28990 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28993 will be sorted before the
28997 since the character
28998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29005 is considered in sorting.
29008 \begin_layout Standard
29009 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29012 \begin_inset space ~
29017 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29018 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29020 For the example given, you can insert
29024 in this field for the
29025 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29032 will be located before
29033 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29039 \begin_layout Standard
29040 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29045 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29054 \begin_layout Subsection
29055 Nomenclature Options
29056 \begin_inset Index idx
29059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29060 Nomenclature ! Options
29068 \begin_layout Standard
29073 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29074 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29077 \begin_layout Description
29078 refeq Appends the phrase
29079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29094 to every nomenclature entry, where
29100 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29103 \begin_layout Description
29104 refpage Appends the phrase
29105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29120 to every nomenclature entry, where
29126 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29129 \begin_layout Description
29130 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29133 \begin_layout Standard
29134 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29135 class options list in the
29137 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29141 In this document the options
29148 \begin_layout Standard
29149 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29155 \begin_layout Standard
29156 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29157 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29162 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29165 \begin_layout Description
29175 \begin_layout Description
29178 nomrefpage Like the
29185 \begin_layout Description
29188 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29197 \begin_layout Description
29201 \begin_inset space ~
29207 \begin_inset space ~
29212 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29215 \begin_layout Standard
29217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29224 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29225 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
29228 \begin_layout Standard
29236 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29239 \begin_inset Newline newline
29246 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29251 \begin_inset Newline newline
29255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29270 by their translation.
29273 \begin_layout Subsection
29274 Printing the Nomenclature
29275 \begin_inset Index idx
29278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29279 Nomenclature ! Printing
29287 \begin_layout Standard
29288 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29290 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29291 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29307 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29308 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29309 You can choose between these settings:
29312 \begin_layout Description
29313 Default a space of 1
29314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29320 \begin_layout Description
29322 \begin_inset space ~
29326 \begin_inset space ~
29329 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29332 \begin_layout Description
29333 Custom custom space
29336 \begin_layout Standard
29337 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29346 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29354 For example, in order to change the name to
29358 , add the following line to the preamble:
29361 \begin_layout Standard
29369 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29372 \begin_layout Subsection
29373 Nomenclature Program
29374 \begin_inset Index idx
29377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29378 Nomenclature ! Program
29384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29386 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29393 \begin_layout Standard
29394 LyX uses the program
29398 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29399 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29404 by adding options, see section
29405 \begin_inset space ~
29409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29411 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29416 The available options are listed and explained in
29417 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29419 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29426 \begin_layout Section
29428 \begin_inset Index idx
29431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29438 \begin_inset Index idx
29441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29442 Document ! Branches
29448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29450 name "sec:Branches"
29457 \begin_layout Standard
29458 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29459 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29460 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29461 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29464 \begin_layout Standard
29465 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29466 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29467 To create a branch, either select the menu
29469 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29470 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29473 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29475 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29482 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29483 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29484 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29485 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29486 (see below for an example).
29487 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29488 to the name of the other) and to add
29489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29501 \begin_inset space ~
29504 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29505 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29508 \begin_layout Standard
29509 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29510 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29512 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29515 where you can choose a branch.
29516 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29520 \begin_layout Standard
29521 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29522 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29525 \begin_layout Standard
29526 \begin_inset Branch Question
29529 \begin_layout Standard
29530 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29538 \begin_layout Standard
29539 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29542 \begin_layout Standard
29543 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29551 \begin_layout Standard
29558 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29559 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29562 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29563 Consider for example a file
29564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29571 which has the above branches.
29573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29580 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29604 branch were inactive,
29605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29620 branch was active, likewise
29621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29636 branch was active, and
29637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29640 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29644 if both branches were active.
29645 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29648 \begin_layout Standard
29649 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29655 \begin_layout Standard
29656 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29657 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29659 For example you can define for the question branch
29663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29664 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29665 \begin_inset space ~
29669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29671 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29683 \begin_layout Standard
29693 \begin_layout Standard
29703 \begin_layout Standard
29704 and for the answer branch
29707 \begin_layout Standard
29717 \begin_layout Standard
29727 \begin_layout Standard
29728 \begin_inset Branch Question
29731 \begin_layout Standard
29735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29763 \begin_layout Standard
29764 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29767 \begin_layout Standard
29771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29799 \begin_layout Standard
29800 Now it is possible to use the
29804 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29811 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29814 commands to obtain conditional output.
29815 Here is an example formula where only the
29822 \begin_inset Formula
29824 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29832 \begin_layout Standard
29833 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29841 \begin_layout Standard
29842 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29848 \begin_inset space \space{}
29851 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29852 For this advanced usage, see the
29857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29860 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29867 \begin_layout Section
29869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29871 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29876 \begin_inset Index idx
29879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29888 \begin_layout Standard
29891 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29892 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29895 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29897 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29902 \begin_inset Index idx
29905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29906 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29911 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29912 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29913 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29914 part of the document.
29918 \begin_layout Standard
29919 The header information in the dialog tab
29923 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29924 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29925 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29926 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29930 \begin_inset space ~
29934 \begin_inset space ~
29939 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29940 title and author entries.
29944 \begin_inset space ~
29948 \begin_inset space ~
29952 \begin_inset space ~
29957 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29960 \begin_layout Standard
29961 You can specify in the dialog tab
29965 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29970 \begin_inset space ~
29974 \begin_inset space ~
29978 \begin_inset space ~
29983 option allows long links to be split;
29986 \begin_inset space ~
29990 \begin_inset space ~
29994 \begin_inset space ~
30002 \begin_inset space ~
30007 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30010 \begin_inset space ~
30015 colors the different links.
30016 The default colors are:
30019 \begin_layout Labeling
30020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30025 for hyperlinks and URLs
30028 \begin_layout Labeling
30029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30037 \begin_layout Labeling
30038 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30046 \begin_layout Standard
30047 but you can change these in the field
30052 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30055 \begin_layout Standard
30058 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30061 \begin_layout Standard
30066 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30067 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30068 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30071 \begin_layout Standard
30076 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30077 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30078 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30088 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30089 when opening the PDF.
30091 \begin_inset space ~
30094 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30095 \begin_inset space ~
30098 1 will only display the sections.
30101 \begin_layout Standard
30102 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30103 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30109 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30110 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30119 \begin_layout Section
30120 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
30121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30123 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30130 \begin_layout Subsection
30132 \begin_inset Index idx
30135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30144 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30151 \begin_layout Standard
30152 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
30153 constructs, but not all.
30154 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30155 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30156 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30157 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
30158 and their commands.
30161 \begin_layout Standard
30162 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
30164 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
30166 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30179 \begin_inset space ~
30184 or by the toolbar button
30197 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30205 \begin_layout Standard
30206 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
30207 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
30208 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30209 using the LaTeX-command
30215 , you can write the command part
30221 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
30225 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
30226 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
30227 the following example:
30230 \begin_layout Standard
30231 \begin_inset Graphics
30232 filename clipart/ERT.png
30240 \begin_layout Standard
30244 \begin_layout Standard
30245 This is a line with a
30249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30272 \begin_layout Standard
30273 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30281 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30282 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
30290 \begin_layout Subsection
30291 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
30292 \begin_inset Argument 1
30295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30302 \begin_inset Index idx
30305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30312 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30314 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
30321 \begin_layout Standard
30322 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30323 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
30324 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
30325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30333 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30334 any time if you know the right commands.
30335 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30336 is the end of the day.
30337 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30338 all caption labels bold.
30339 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30341 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30345 \begin_layout Standard
30346 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30347 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30348 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30350 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30359 \begin_layout Standard
30360 As result you find that the package
30365 \begin_inset Index idx
30368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30369 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30375 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30377 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30380 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30395 \begin_inset space ~
30403 \begin_layout Standard
30408 usepackage[options]{package name}
30411 \begin_layout Standard
30412 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30413 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30414 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30417 \begin_layout Standard
30418 In your case the package name is
30423 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30428 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30429 So you add the command
30432 \begin_layout Standard
30437 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30440 \begin_layout Standard
30441 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30446 For more commands provided by the
30450 package, have a look at its documentation,
30451 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30465 \begin_layout Standard
30466 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30468 For example if you use a
30472 class, you don't need the package
30476 , you can instead write
30479 \begin_layout Standard
30484 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30489 \begin_layout Standard
30490 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30491 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30492 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30499 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30502 \begin_layout Standard
30503 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30504 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30506 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30507 the previous section.
30510 \begin_layout Standard
30511 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30513 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30515 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30522 \begin_layout Standard
30523 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30529 \begin_layout Standard
30533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30543 \begin_inset Note Note
30546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30547 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30555 \begin_layout Left Header
30556 \begin_inset Argument 1
30559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30579 \begin_inset Note Note
30582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30583 defines the header line as described below
30591 \begin_layout Center Header
30592 \begin_inset Argument 1
30595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30604 \begin_layout Right Header
30605 \begin_inset Argument 1
30608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30629 \begin_layout Left Footer
30630 \begin_inset Argument 1
30633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30654 \begin_layout Center Footer
30655 \begin_inset Argument 1
30658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30669 \begin_inset Newline newline
30673 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30679 \begin_layout Right Footer
30680 \begin_inset Argument 1
30683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30705 \begin_layout Section
30706 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30709 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30714 \begin_inset Index idx
30717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30718 Document ! Header/Footer line
30724 \begin_inset Index idx
30727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30736 \begin_layout Standard
30737 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30741 \begin_inset space ~
30752 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30758 \begin_inset space ~
30764 As a second step add in the menu
30766 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30767 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30774 Custom Header/Footerlines
30775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30779 This module offers the following 6
30780 \begin_inset space ~
30786 \begin_layout Description
30788 \begin_inset space ~
30792 \begin_inset space ~
30796 \begin_inset space ~
30800 \begin_inset space ~
30804 \begin_inset space ~
30810 \begin_layout Description
30812 \begin_inset space ~
30816 \begin_inset space ~
30820 \begin_inset space ~
30824 \begin_inset space ~
30828 \begin_inset space ~
30834 \begin_layout Standard
30835 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30838 \begin_layout Standard
30839 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30840 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30842 \begin_inset space ~
30846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30848 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30852 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30855 \begin_layout Standard
30856 \begin_inset Float figure
30862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30865 \begin_inset Tabular
30866 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30867 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30868 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30869 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30870 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30872 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30890 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30901 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30919 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30930 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30934 The normal text on the page goes here.
30935 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30937 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30938 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30943 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30952 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30963 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30981 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30992 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31010 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31028 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31033 name "fig:Page-layout"
31037 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31050 \begin_layout Standard
31051 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31059 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31063 \begin_inset space ~
31068 is set to “Default”.
31069 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31078 \begin_layout Subsection
31082 \begin_layout Standard
31083 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31084 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31085 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31086 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31088 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31089 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31092 \begin_layout Standard
31093 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
31096 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31109 \begin_inset space ~
31117 \begin_layout Description
31120 thepage prints the current page number
31123 \begin_layout Description
31126 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31129 \begin_layout Description
31132 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31135 \begin_layout Description
31138 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31139 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31146 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31149 because it usually goes in a left header.
31152 \begin_layout Description
31155 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31156 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31158 It is normally used in the right header.
31161 \begin_layout Subsection
31162 Default header/footer
31165 \begin_layout Standard
31166 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31167 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31168 footer has the page number.
31169 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31170 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31171 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31174 \begin_inset space ~
31182 \begin_layout Subsection
31186 \begin_layout Standard
31187 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31188 Some pages are different.
31189 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31190 a new part or chapter in your book.
31191 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31192 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31193 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31196 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31197 Header and footer decoration line
31200 \begin_layout Standard
31201 By default, you get a 0.4
31202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31205 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31206 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31218 in the following way:
31221 \begin_layout Standard
31228 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31231 \begin_layout Standard
31232 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31241 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31248 \begin_layout Standard
31249 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
31250 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31251 \begin_inset space ~
31255 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31265 Several header/footer lines
31268 \begin_layout Standard
31269 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31270 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31271 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31273 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
31287 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31288 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31301 \begin_inset space ~
31309 \begin_layout Standard
31316 headheight}{height}
31319 \begin_layout Standard
31320 where height is a size in standard units.
31321 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31322 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31323 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
31325 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31342 \begin_inset space ~
31347 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31352 \begin_inset Index idx
31355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31356 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31362 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31363 for your header/footer.
31366 \begin_layout Subsection
31370 \begin_layout Standard
31371 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31372 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31373 This example consists of the following definition:
31376 \begin_layout Description
31378 \begin_inset space ~
31387 , empty optional argument
31390 \begin_layout Description
31392 \begin_inset space ~
31395 Header empty, empty optional argument
31398 \begin_layout Description
31400 \begin_inset space ~
31409 in the optional argument
31412 \begin_layout Description
31414 \begin_inset space ~
31423 in the optional argument
31426 \begin_layout Description
31428 \begin_inset space ~
31440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31444 \begin_inset Newline newline
31448 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31455 in the optional argument
31458 \begin_layout Description
31460 \begin_inset space ~
31469 , empty optional argument
31472 \begin_layout Description
31475 headrulewidth set to 2
31476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31482 \begin_layout Standard
31483 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31484 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31490 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31499 \begin_layout Standard
31500 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31506 \begin_layout Standard
31510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31514 pagestyle{headings}
31520 \begin_inset Note Note
31523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31524 switches back to page style with the default headings
31532 \begin_layout Section
31533 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31536 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31541 \begin_inset Index idx
31544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31551 \begin_inset Index idx
31554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31563 \begin_layout Standard
31564 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31565 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31566 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31569 \begin_layout Subsection
31573 \begin_layout Standard
31574 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31579 \begin_inset Index idx
31582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31583 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31588 (on some systems named simply
31593 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31595 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31601 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31602 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31610 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31611 automatically installed together with LyX.
31614 \begin_layout Subsection
31618 \begin_layout Standard
31619 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31620 LaTeX, activate the option
31623 \begin_inset space ~
31630 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31636 \begin_inset space ~
31640 \begin_inset space ~
31643 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31650 \begin_inset space ~
31663 \begin_inset space ~
31668 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31671 \begin_layout Standard
31672 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31676 \begin_inset space ~
31684 \begin_inset space ~
31692 \begin_layout Standard
31693 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31697 \begin_layout Standard
31698 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31706 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31707 generated by activating the option
31710 \begin_inset space ~
31716 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31724 \begin_layout Subsection
31725 Selected document parts
31728 \begin_layout Standard
31729 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31730 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31731 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31732 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31734 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31738 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31739 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31740 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31743 \begin_layout Standard
31744 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31750 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31761 is explained in section
31763 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31768 \begin_inset space ~
31778 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31779 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31781 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31783 Here is the result:
31786 \begin_layout Standard
31787 \begin_inset Preview
31789 \begin_layout Standard
31794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31798 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31804 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31814 height_special "totalheight"
31817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31842 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31848 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31870 \begin_layout Standard
31871 Previewing works also for colors.
31872 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31890 is explained in section
31897 \begin_inset space ~
31910 \begin_layout Standard
31911 \begin_inset Preview
31913 \begin_layout Standard
31917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31936 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31941 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31960 \begin_layout Standard
31961 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31967 \begin_layout Standard
31968 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31969 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31970 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31972 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31973 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31974 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31975 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31979 \begin_layout Subsection
31983 \begin_layout Standard
31984 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31987 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31989 \begin_inset space ~
31994 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31995 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31997 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31998 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31999 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32000 the source view window.
32005 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
32006 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
32007 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
32010 \begin_layout Section
32011 Advanced Find and Replace
32012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32014 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32019 \begin_inset Index idx
32022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32029 \begin_inset Index idx
32032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32041 \begin_layout Subsection
32045 \begin_layout Standard
32046 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
32047 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
32048 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32049 The key-features are:
32052 \begin_layout Itemize
32053 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32054 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32055 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32059 \begin_layout Itemize
32060 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32061 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32062 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32063 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32066 \begin_layout Itemize
32067 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32068 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32069 outside of mathematics environments
32072 \begin_layout Itemize
32073 Search may be widened to a specific
32078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32082 \begin_inset space ~
32085 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32086 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32093 \begin_layout Itemize
32094 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32095 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32096 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32100 \begin_inset space ~
32103 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32106 \begin_layout Subsection
32110 \begin_layout Standard
32111 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32113 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32126 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32129 ) or the toolbar button
32132 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32138 Advanced Find and Replace
32143 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32147 \begin_layout Standard
32152 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32156 \begin_inset space ~
32161 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32164 arg "paragraph-break"
32168 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32169 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32173 arg "paragraph-break"
32176 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32180 searches backwards.
32183 \begin_layout Standard
32187 \begin_inset space ~
32192 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32201 \begin_inset space ~
32206 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32209 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32210 Searching for mathematics
32213 \begin_layout Standard
32214 Mathematical formulas, such as
32215 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32218 or something more complex like
32219 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32222 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32227 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32228 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32229 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32230 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32240 \begin_layout Standard
32241 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32242 This is done by switching to the
32246 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32251 This way, entering in the
32258 \begin_layout Itemize
32259 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32260 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32263 \begin_layout Itemize
32264 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32265 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32268 \begin_layout Itemize
32269 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32270 of it only within section headings.
32271 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32272 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32276 \begin_layout Itemize
32277 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32278 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32281 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32285 \begin_layout Standard
32286 The entries made in the
32290 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32293 \begin_inset space ~
32299 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32303 button or alternatively press
32306 arg "paragraph-break"
32313 while the cursor is in the
32316 \begin_inset space ~
32324 \begin_layout Standard
32325 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
32326 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32330 \begin_layout Itemize
32331 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32332 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32340 with its typewriter version
32341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32355 \begin_layout Itemize
32356 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32362 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32374 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32381 (you may want to enable the
32384 \begin_inset space ~
32392 \begin_inset space ~
32397 options and disable the
32405 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32413 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32414 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32418 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32421 , or occurrences of
32422 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32426 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32432 \begin_layout Subsection
32436 \begin_layout Standard
32437 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32442 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32444 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32446 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32455 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32461 This is done with the context menu
32463 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32464 Insert Regular Expression
32466 while the cursor is in the
32471 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32472 expression matching rules
32476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32477 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32483 \begin_inset space ~
32486 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32487 to match expressions.
32492 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32493 same text in the document.
32494 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32495 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32498 \begin_layout Enumerate
32499 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32504 editor the fraction
32505 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32509 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32512 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32513 fractions with the given denominator.
32516 \begin_layout Enumerate
32517 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32529 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32534 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32535 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32536 Also, by inserting a
32537 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32540 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32541 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32544 \begin_layout Standard
32545 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32546 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32547 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32550 , and referring back to them through
32551 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32555 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32559 For example, try searching with the regexp
32560 \begin_inset Newline newline
32563 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32566 \begin_inset Newline newline
32569 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32572 \begin_layout Standard
32573 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32576 \begin_layout Standard
32577 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32585 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32586 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32587 sub-expressions is absolute.
32589 \begin_inset space ~
32593 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32596 always refers to the first occurrence of
32597 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32600 in all entered regexps.
32608 \begin_layout Section
32610 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32612 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32617 \begin_inset Index idx
32620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32629 \begin_layout Standard
32630 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32633 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32640 key or the toolbar button
32643 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32646 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32647 beginning of the currently selected text.
32648 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32649 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32650 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32651 scrolled so that it is visible.
32652 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32653 n, if any could be found.
32654 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32658 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32659 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32662 \begin_layout Standard
32663 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32666 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32670 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32671 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32672 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32673 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32676 \begin_inset space ~
32684 arg "dialog-show character"
32687 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32688 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32691 \begin_layout Standard
32692 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32693 \begin_inset Newline newline
32697 \begin_inset Flex URL
32700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32702 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32708 \begin_inset Newline newline
32712 \begin_inset space ~
32715 files for each language.
32716 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32717 \begin_inset space ~
32720 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32729 \begin_inset Newline newline
32732 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32733 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32734 but in most cases these are
32750 is the language code.
32753 \begin_layout Subsection
32757 \begin_layout Standard
32760 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32761 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32763 \begin_inset space ~
32766 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32769 you can set the following things:
32772 \begin_layout Description
32774 \begin_inset space ~
32777 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32778 Depending on your platform,
32792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32793 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32794 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32809 \begin_layout Description
32811 \begin_inset space ~
32814 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32815 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32818 \begin_layout Description
32820 \begin_inset space ~
32823 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32829 \begin_inset space \space{}
32833 This should normally not be needed.
32836 \begin_layout Description
32838 \begin_inset space ~
32842 \begin_inset space ~
32845 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32857 \begin_layout Description
32859 \begin_inset space ~
32862 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32863 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32864 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32865 appear in a context menu.
32866 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32870 \begin_layout Description
32872 \begin_inset space ~
32876 \begin_inset space ~
32880 \begin_inset space ~
32883 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32887 \begin_layout Section
32889 \begin_inset Index idx
32892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32901 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32908 \begin_layout Standard
32909 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32910 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32920 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32922 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32931 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32932 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32933 which are available for many languages.
32936 \begin_layout Standard
32937 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32941 \begin_layout Subsection
32942 Setting up the thesaurus
32945 \begin_layout Standard
32954 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32958 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32963 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32969 \begin_inset space ~
32977 For instance, the US English files are named:
32980 \begin_layout Itemize
32984 \begin_layout Itemize
32988 \begin_layout Standard
32997 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32998 and you just need to point LyX (in
33000 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33001 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33002 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33004 \begin_inset space ~
33009 ) to the path where they are installed.
33013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33014 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33015 ies, typical locations are
33021 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33025 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33029 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33032 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33038 LibreOffice-<Version>
33045 On the Mac, the default location is
33047 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
33048 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33049 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
33050 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
33051 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33052 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33060 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33061 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
33062 correct place right away.
33065 \begin_layout Standard
33066 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
33067 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33071 \begin_layout Itemize
33072 \begin_inset Flex URL
33075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33077 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33085 \begin_layout Standard
33086 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33087 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33089 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33090 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33091 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33093 \begin_inset space ~
33099 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33100 and point LyX there.
33103 \begin_layout Standard
33104 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33106 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33109 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33115 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33118 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33126 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33127 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33128 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33130 \begin_inset space ~
33135 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33138 \begin_layout Subsection
33139 Using the thesaurus
33142 \begin_layout Standard
33143 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33145 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33148 or the toolbar button
33151 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33154 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33156 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33158 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33159 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33160 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33169 ), related terms (such as
33172 \begin_inset space ~
33181 ), compounds (such as
33184 \begin_inset space ~
33193 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33202 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33205 \begin_layout Standard
33206 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33207 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33211 \begin_layout Standard
33212 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33213 the dictionary, such as the above
33217 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33222 \begin_inset space \space{}
33225 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33226 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33227 For example, looking up the word form
33231 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33236 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33241 \begin_inset space \space{}
33252 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33253 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33254 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33257 \begin_layout Section
33259 \begin_inset Index idx
33262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33269 \begin_inset Index idx
33272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33273 Document ! Change Tracking
33279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33281 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33288 \begin_layout Standard
33289 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33290 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33291 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33292 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33294 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33296 \begin_inset space ~
33299 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33301 \begin_inset space ~
33309 \begin_layout Standard
33310 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33324 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33325 You can change the color in
33327 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33328 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33330 \begin_inset space ~
33334 \begin_inset space ~
33339 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33345 \begin_inset Index idx
33348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33349 Color ! Change tracking
33354 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33355 the cursor is in changed text.
33356 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33359 arg "changes-merge"
33365 \begin_layout Standard
33366 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33367 \begin_inset Index idx
33370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33379 \begin_layout Standard
33380 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33386 \begin_layout Standard
33387 \begin_inset Graphics
33388 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33396 \begin_layout Standard
33397 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33403 \begin_layout Standard
33404 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33407 \begin_layout Standard
33408 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33414 \begin_layout Standard
33415 \begin_inset Tabular
33416 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33417 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33418 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33419 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33420 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33429 arg "changes-track"
33437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33443 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33445 \begin_inset space ~
33448 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33450 \begin_inset space ~
33459 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33468 arg "changes-output"
33476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33482 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33484 \begin_inset space ~
33487 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33489 \begin_inset space ~
33493 \begin_inset space ~
33497 \begin_inset space ~
33506 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33527 Jumps to the next change
33533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33542 arg "change-accept"
33550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33556 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33558 \begin_inset space ~
33561 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33563 \begin_inset space ~
33572 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33581 arg "change-reject"
33589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33595 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33597 \begin_inset space ~
33600 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33602 \begin_inset space ~
33611 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33620 arg "changes-merge"
33628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33634 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33636 \begin_inset space ~
33639 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33641 \begin_inset space ~
33650 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33659 arg "all-changes-accept"
33667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33673 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33675 \begin_inset space ~
33678 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33680 \begin_inset space ~
33684 \begin_inset space ~
33693 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33702 arg "all-changes-reject"
33710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33716 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33718 \begin_inset space ~
33721 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33723 \begin_inset space ~
33727 \begin_inset space ~
33736 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33759 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33760 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33773 \begin_inset space ~
33782 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33805 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33807 \begin_inset space ~
33823 \begin_layout Standard
33824 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33830 \begin_layout Standard
33831 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33851 \begin_layout Standard
33852 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33853 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33854 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33855 the next change after the current cursor position.
33856 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33857 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33858 step to the next change.
33859 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33862 \begin_layout Standard
33863 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33864 to describe a change.
33867 \begin_layout Standard
33868 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33873 \begin_inset Index idx
33876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33877 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33883 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33884 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33890 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33893 \begin_layout Section
33894 Comparison of Documents
33895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33897 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33902 \begin_inset Index idx
33905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33906 Comparison of documents
33914 \begin_layout Standard
33915 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33917 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33921 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33923 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33924 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33928 \begin_inset space ~
33932 \begin_inset space ~
33936 \begin_inset space ~
33945 \begin_inset space ~
33949 \begin_inset space ~
33953 \begin_inset space ~
33957 \begin_inset space ~
33961 \begin_inset space ~
33965 \begin_inset space ~
33970 enables the change tracking option
33973 \begin_inset space ~
33977 \begin_inset space ~
33981 \begin_inset space ~
33986 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33989 \begin_layout Section
33990 International Support
33991 \begin_inset Index idx
33994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33995 International support
34003 \begin_layout Standard
34004 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
34005 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34006 up LyX to use them:
34007 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34009 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34016 \begin_layout Standard
34017 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34018 \begin_inset space ~
34022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34024 reference "sub:Special-Character"
34031 \begin_layout Subsection
34033 \begin_inset Index idx
34036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34043 \begin_inset Index idx
34046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34047 Document ! Settings
34053 \begin_inset Index idx
34056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34057 Document ! Language
34065 \begin_layout Standard
34068 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34069 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34072 dialog lets you set
34074 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34079 \begin_layout Standard
34084 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
34088 \begin_inset space ~
34093 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34094 For details about the different encoding options see section
34095 \begin_inset space ~
34099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34101 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34108 \begin_layout Subsection
34109 Keyboard mapping configuration
34110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34112 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
34119 \begin_layout Standard
34120 If you have for example a U.
34121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34124 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34125 can use an alternate keymap.
34126 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
34127 use an Italian keymap.
34130 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34131 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34132 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34135 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34136 \begin_inset space ~
34140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34142 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
34147 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34148 which one you want to use.
34151 \begin_layout Standard
34152 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34153 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34154 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34155 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34158 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34159 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34160 one to support the characters you want.
34161 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34168 \begin_layout Chapter
34171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34173 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34180 \begin_layout Standard
34181 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34182 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34183 topic inside the user's guide.
34186 \begin_layout Section
34188 \begin_inset Index idx
34191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34200 \begin_layout Standard
34205 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34208 \begin_layout Subsection
34212 \begin_layout Standard
34213 Creates a new document.
34216 \begin_layout Subsection
34220 \begin_layout Standard
34221 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34222 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34223 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34226 \begin_layout Subsection
34230 \begin_layout Standard
34234 \begin_layout Subsection
34238 \begin_layout Standard
34239 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34240 Click there on a file to open it.
34243 \begin_layout Subsection
34247 \begin_layout Standard
34248 Closes the current document.
34251 \begin_layout Subsection
34255 \begin_layout Standard
34256 Closes all opened documents.
34259 \begin_layout Subsection
34263 \begin_layout Standard
34264 Saves the actual document.
34267 \begin_layout Subsection
34271 \begin_layout Standard
34272 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34275 \begin_layout Subsection
34279 \begin_layout Standard
34280 Saves all opened documents.
34283 \begin_layout Subsection
34287 \begin_layout Standard
34288 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34291 \begin_layout Subsection
34295 \begin_layout Standard
34296 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34297 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34298 It is described in the section
34300 Version Control in LyX
34304 Additional Features
34309 \begin_layout Subsection
34313 \begin_layout Standard
34314 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
34315 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
34317 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
34320 \begin_layout Standard
34321 When using the menu entry
34324 \begin_inset space ~
34329 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34333 \begin_inset space ~
34337 \begin_inset space ~
34341 \begin_inset space ~
34346 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34347 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34350 \begin_layout Subsection
34352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34361 \begin_layout Standard
34362 You can export your document to various file formats.
34363 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34364 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34365 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34368 \begin_layout Standard
34369 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34371 \begin_inset space ~
34375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34377 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34384 \begin_layout Description
34390 \begin_inset space ~
34397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34404 yX format of the special LyX
34405 \begin_inset space ~
34408 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34409 \begin_inset Newline newline
34412 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34415 \begin_layout Description
34416 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34422 \begin_layout Description
34424 \begin_inset space ~
34427 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34433 \begin_layout Description
34434 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34435 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34436 files paths or file names in your document.
34437 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34444 \begin_layout Description
34445 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34446 in files paths or file names
34449 \begin_layout Description
34451 \begin_inset space ~
34458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34465 eX) DVI-format using the program
34469 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34472 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34480 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34488 \begin_layout Description
34490 \begin_inset space ~
34493 (cropped) the same as
34497 but with cropped page margins.
34500 \begin_layout Description
34502 \begin_inset space ~
34505 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34509 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34514 \begin_layout Description
34518 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34526 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34534 \begin_layout Description
34536 \begin_inset space ~
34540 \begin_inset space ~
34543 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34547 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34555 \begin_layout Description
34562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34570 \begin_inset space ~
34581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34594 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34599 \begin_layout Description
34606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34614 \begin_inset space ~
34619 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34620 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34624 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34627 \begin_layout Description
34634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34642 \begin_inset space ~
34647 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34648 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34656 \begin_layout Description
34663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34671 \begin_inset space ~
34682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34695 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34700 \begin_layout Description
34702 \begin_inset space ~
34706 \begin_inset space ~
34715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34724 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34725 music notation software
34730 \begin_layout Description
34737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34747 \begin_inset space ~
34750 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (e.
34751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34755 \begin_inset space \space{}
34759 \begin_inset space ~
34763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34778 represent the version number)
34781 \begin_layout Description
34788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34798 \begin_inset space ~
34802 \begin_inset space ~
34805 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34806 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34807 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34810 \begin_layout Description
34817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34826 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34829 \begin_layout Description
34830 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34835 \begin_layout Description
34836 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34838 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34841 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34845 \begin_layout Description
34847 \begin_inset space ~
34850 (cropped) the same as
34853 \begin_inset space ~
34858 but with cropped page margins
34861 \begin_layout Description
34865 \begin_inset space ~
34870 PDF-format using the program
34874 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34877 \begin_layout Description
34881 \begin_inset space ~
34885 \begin_inset space ~
34893 \begin_inset space ~
34898 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34903 \begin_inset space \space{}
34906 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34910 \begin_layout Description
34914 \begin_inset space ~
34921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34930 PDF-format using the program
34934 , produces PDF-files directly
34937 \begin_layout Description
34941 \begin_inset space ~
34946 PDF-format using the program
34950 , produces PDF-files directly
34953 \begin_layout Description
34957 \begin_inset space ~
34962 PDF-format using the program
34966 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34969 \begin_layout Description
34973 \begin_inset space ~
34980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34989 PDF-format using the program
34993 , produces PDF-files directly
34996 \begin_layout Description
35000 \begin_inset space ~
35008 \begin_layout Description
35012 \begin_inset space ~
35016 \begin_inset space ~
35021 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35022 and then exported as text using the program
35027 \begin_layout Description
35032 PostScript format using the program
35037 \begin_layout Description
35038 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
35039 programming language
35052 it is possible to use
35059 \begin_layout Standard
35060 If one of the menu entries
35067 \begin_inset space ~
35076 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
35077 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
35078 \begin_inset space ~
35082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35084 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35089 \begin_inset Index idx
35092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35093 Reconfiguration of LyX
35101 \begin_layout Subsection
35105 \begin_layout Standard
35106 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
35107 format or send it to a printer.
35108 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
35109 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
35115 For more information have a look at section
35116 \begin_inset space ~
35120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35122 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
35129 \begin_layout Subsection
35133 \begin_layout Standard
35134 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35135 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
35136 prefix, see section
35137 \begin_inset space ~
35141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35143 reference "sec:Paths"
35148 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35157 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35158 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
35159 \begin_inset space ~
35163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35165 reference "sub:Converters"
35172 \begin_layout Subsection
35173 New and Close Window
35176 \begin_layout Standard
35177 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
35180 \begin_layout Subsection
35184 \begin_layout Standard
35185 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35188 \begin_layout Section
35190 \begin_inset Index idx
35193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35202 \begin_layout Subsection
35206 \begin_layout Standard
35207 Described in section
35208 \begin_inset space ~
35212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35214 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35221 \begin_layout Subsection
35222 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35225 \begin_layout Standard
35226 Described in section
35227 \begin_inset space ~
35231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35233 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35240 \begin_layout Subsection
35244 \begin_layout Standard
35245 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35246 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35249 \begin_layout Subsection
35253 \begin_layout Standard
35254 Selects the whole document.
35257 \begin_layout Subsection
35258 Find & Replace (Quick)
35261 \begin_layout Standard
35262 Described in section
35263 \begin_inset space ~
35267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35269 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35276 \begin_layout Subsection
35277 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35280 \begin_layout Standard
35281 Described in section
35282 \begin_inset space ~
35286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35288 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35295 \begin_layout Subsection
35296 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35299 \begin_layout Standard
35300 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35304 \begin_layout Subsection
35308 \begin_layout Standard
35309 Described in section
35310 \begin_inset space ~
35314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35316 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35323 \begin_layout Subsection
35325 \begin_inset Index idx
35328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35329 Paragraph ! Settings
35337 \begin_layout Standard
35338 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35339 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35343 \begin_layout Standard
35344 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35345 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35351 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35352 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35354 \begin_inset space ~
35362 \begin_layout Subsection
35366 \begin_layout Standard
35367 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35368 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35369 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35373 \begin_layout Standard
35374 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35376 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35377 The properties of tables are described in section
35378 \begin_inset space ~
35382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35384 reference "sec:Tables"
35388 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35389 \begin_inset space ~
35393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35395 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35402 \begin_layout Subsection
35403 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35406 \begin_layout Standard
35407 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35409 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35410 \begin_inset space ~
35414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35416 reference "sec:Nesting"
35421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35423 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35430 \begin_layout Subsection
35433 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35436 \begin_layout Standard
35437 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35438 nts of the same type.
35440 \begin_inset space ~
35444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35446 reference "sub:Separate-Nestings"
35450 for an explanation.
35453 \begin_layout Section
35455 \begin_inset Index idx
35458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35467 \begin_layout Standard
35468 At the bottom of the
35472 menu the opened documents are listed.
35475 \begin_layout Subsection
35476 Open/Close all Insets
35479 \begin_layout Standard
35480 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35483 \begin_layout Subsection
35484 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35487 \begin_layout Standard
35488 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35491 \begin_layout Standard
35492 Math macros are described in the
35499 \begin_layout Subsection
35503 \begin_layout Standard
35504 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35505 \begin_inset space ~
35509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35511 reference "sec:Navigating"
35516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35518 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35525 \begin_layout Subsection
35529 \begin_layout Standard
35530 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35532 \begin_inset space ~
35536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35538 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35545 \begin_layout Subsection
35549 \begin_layout Standard
35550 Opens a window showing console messages.
35551 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35555 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35556 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35559 \begin_layout Subsection
35561 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35563 name "sub:Toolbars"
35568 \begin_inset Index idx
35571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35580 \begin_layout Standard
35581 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35582 All toolbars and the
35585 \begin_inset space ~
35590 can be turned on and off.
35595 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35607 \begin_inset space ~
35619 \begin_inset space ~
35624 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35628 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35635 \begin_layout Standard
35640 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35644 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35645 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35646 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35647 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35648 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35651 \begin_layout Standard
35652 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35653 \begin_inset space ~
35657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35659 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35666 \begin_layout Subsection
35670 \begin_layout Standard
35674 \begin_inset space ~
35678 \begin_inset space ~
35682 \begin_inset space ~
35686 \begin_inset space ~
35690 \begin_inset space ~
35694 \begin_inset space ~
35699 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35702 \begin_inset space ~
35706 \begin_inset space ~
35710 \begin_inset space ~
35714 \begin_inset space ~
35718 \begin_inset space ~
35722 \begin_inset space ~
35727 will split it horizontally.
35728 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35729 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35730 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35731 three or more documents at the same time.
35732 To close a split view, use the menu
35735 \begin_inset space ~
35739 \begin_inset space ~
35747 \begin_layout Subsection
35751 \begin_layout Standard
35752 Closes a split view.
35755 \begin_layout Subsection
35759 \begin_layout Standard
35760 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35761 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35762 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35763 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35764 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35767 \begin_layout Section
35769 \begin_inset Index idx
35772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35781 \begin_layout Subsection
35785 \begin_layout Standard
35786 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35787 \begin_inset space ~
35791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35793 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35804 \begin_layout Subsection
35806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35808 name "sub:Special-Character"
35815 \begin_layout Standard
35816 Here you can insert the following characters:
35819 \begin_layout Description
35824 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35826 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35827 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35828 You can get a complete display by checking
35831 \begin_inset space ~
35837 \begin_inset Newline newline
35841 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35849 Not all characters will be visible in the
35853 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35861 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35865 ) can display every character.
35873 \begin_layout Description
35874 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35878 \begin_layout Description
35880 \begin_inset space ~
35884 \begin_inset space ~
35887 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35888 \begin_inset space ~
35892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35894 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35901 \begin_layout Description
35903 \begin_inset space ~
35906 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35909 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35910 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35916 \begin_layout Description
35918 \begin_inset space ~
35921 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35924 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35925 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35931 \begin_layout Description
35933 \begin_inset space ~
35936 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35940 \begin_layout Description
35942 \begin_inset space ~
35945 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35949 \begin_layout Description
35951 \begin_inset space ~
35954 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35960 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35966 \begin_layout Description
35968 \begin_inset space ~
35971 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35975 \begin_layout Description
35977 \begin_inset space ~
35981 \begin_inset Index idx
35984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35991 \begin_inset Index idx
35994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35995 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36000 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36001 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36003 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
36008 \begin_inset Index idx
36011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36012 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
36018 \begin_inset Newline newline
36021 More information about this feature can be found in the
36027 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36033 \begin_layout Subsection
36037 \begin_layout Standard
36038 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36041 \begin_layout Description
36042 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36043 \begin_inset script superscript
36045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36054 \begin_layout Description
36055 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36056 \begin_inset script subscript
36058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36067 \begin_layout Description
36069 \begin_inset space ~
36072 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36073 \begin_inset space ~
36077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36079 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
36086 \begin_layout Description
36088 \begin_inset space ~
36091 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36092 \begin_inset space ~
36096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36098 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
36105 \begin_layout Description
36107 \begin_inset space ~
36110 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36111 \begin_inset space ~
36115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36117 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
36124 \begin_layout Description
36126 \begin_inset space ~
36129 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36135 \begin_inset space \space{}
36138 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36139 An example from the LyX
36144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36147 To insert a fraction use the command
36152 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36156 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36165 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36172 \begin_layout Description
36174 \begin_inset space ~
36177 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36178 \begin_inset space ~
36182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36184 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
36191 \begin_layout Description
36193 \begin_inset space ~
36196 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36197 \begin_inset space ~
36201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36203 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
36210 \begin_layout Description
36212 \begin_inset space ~
36215 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36216 \begin_inset space ~
36220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36222 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
36229 \begin_layout Description
36230 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36231 \begin_inset space ~
36235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36237 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
36244 \begin_layout Description
36246 \begin_inset space ~
36249 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36250 \begin_inset space ~
36254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36256 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
36263 \begin_layout Description
36265 \begin_inset space ~
36268 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36269 \begin_inset space ~
36273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36275 reference "sub:Ligatures"
36282 \begin_layout Description
36284 \begin_inset space ~
36288 \begin_inset space ~
36291 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36292 \begin_inset space ~
36296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36298 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36305 \begin_layout Description
36307 \begin_inset space ~
36310 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36311 as described in section
36312 \begin_inset space ~
36316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36318 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36325 \begin_layout Description
36327 \begin_inset space ~
36330 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36331 \begin_inset space ~
36335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36337 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36344 \begin_layout Description
36346 \begin_inset space ~
36349 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36350 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36352 \begin_inset space ~
36356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36358 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36365 \begin_layout Description
36367 \begin_inset space ~
36370 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36371 \begin_inset space ~
36375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36377 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36384 \begin_layout Description
36386 \begin_inset space ~
36390 \begin_inset space ~
36393 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36394 \begin_inset space ~
36398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36400 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36407 \begin_layout Subsection
36411 \begin_layout Standard
36412 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36416 \begin_inset space ~
36437 are described in section
36438 \begin_inset space ~
36442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36444 reference "sec:toc"
36453 is described in section
36454 \begin_inset space ~
36458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36460 reference "sec:Index"
36468 is described in section
36469 \begin_inset space ~
36473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36475 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36481 BibTeX Bibliography
36483 is described in section
36484 \begin_inset space ~
36488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36490 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36497 \begin_layout Subsection
36501 \begin_layout Standard
36502 To insert floats, as described in section
36503 \begin_inset space ~
36507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36509 reference "sec:Floats"
36513 and in detail the chapter
36520 \begin_inset space ~
36528 \begin_layout Subsection
36532 \begin_layout Standard
36533 To insert notes, described in section
36534 \begin_inset space ~
36538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36540 reference "sec:Notes"
36547 \begin_layout Subsection
36551 \begin_layout Standard
36552 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36554 Branches are described in section
36555 \begin_inset space ~
36559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36561 reference "sec:Branches"
36568 \begin_layout Subsection
36572 \begin_layout Standard
36573 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36574 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36576 An example is the document class
36577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36584 with three custom insets.
36587 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36591 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36597 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36600 \begin_layout Subsection
36602 \begin_inset Index idx
36605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36614 \begin_layout Standard
36615 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36617 For more information see chapter
36619 External Document Parts
36622 \begin_inset space ~
36628 \begin_layout Subsection
36630 \begin_inset Index idx
36633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36642 \begin_layout Standard
36643 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36644 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36651 \begin_inset space ~
36659 \begin_layout Subsection
36663 \begin_layout Standard
36668 dialog as described in section
36669 \begin_inset space ~
36673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36675 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36682 \begin_layout Subsection
36686 \begin_layout Standard
36691 as described in section
36692 \begin_inset space ~
36696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36698 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36705 \begin_layout Subsection
36709 \begin_layout Standard
36714 as described in section
36715 \begin_inset space ~
36719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36721 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36728 \begin_layout Subsection
36730 \begin_inset Index idx
36733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36740 \begin_inset Index idx
36743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36744 Longtables ! Caption
36752 \begin_layout Standard
36753 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36754 Floats are described in section
36755 \begin_inset space ~
36759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36761 reference "sec:Floats"
36765 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36772 \begin_inset space ~
36780 \begin_layout Subsection
36784 \begin_layout Standard
36785 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36786 \begin_inset space ~
36790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36792 reference "sec:Index"
36799 \begin_layout Subsection
36803 \begin_layout Standard
36804 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36805 \begin_inset space ~
36809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36811 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36818 \begin_layout Subsection
36822 \begin_layout Standard
36823 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36824 Tables are described in section
36825 \begin_inset space ~
36829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36831 reference "sec:Tables"
36835 and in detail in the chapter
36842 \begin_inset space ~
36850 \begin_layout Subsection
36854 \begin_layout Standard
36860 Graphics are described in section
36861 \begin_inset space ~
36865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36867 reference "sec:Graphics"
36874 \begin_layout Subsection
36878 \begin_layout Standard
36879 Inserts a URL as described in section
36880 \begin_inset space ~
36884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36886 reference "sub:URLs"
36893 \begin_layout Subsection
36897 \begin_layout Standard
36898 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36899 \begin_inset space ~
36903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36905 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36912 \begin_layout Subsection
36916 \begin_layout Standard
36917 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36918 \begin_inset space ~
36922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36924 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36931 \begin_layout Subsection
36935 \begin_layout Standard
36936 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36937 \begin_inset space ~
36941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36943 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36950 \begin_layout Subsection
36954 \begin_layout Standard
36955 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36956 title or caption of a float.
36957 Inserts a short title as described in section
36958 \begin_inset space ~
36962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36964 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36971 \begin_layout Subsection
36975 \begin_layout Standard
36976 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36977 \begin_inset space ~
36981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36983 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36990 \begin_layout Subsection
36992 \begin_inset Index idx
36995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37004 \begin_layout Standard
37005 Inserts a program listings box.
37006 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37008 Program Code Listings
37013 \begin_inset space ~
37021 \begin_layout Subsection
37025 \begin_layout Standard
37026 Inserts the actual date.
37027 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37029 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37037 \begin_inset space ~
37045 \begin_layout Subsection
37049 \begin_layout Standard
37050 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37051 \begin_inset space ~
37055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37057 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37064 \begin_layout Section
37066 \begin_inset Index idx
37069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37078 \begin_layout Standard
37079 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37080 \begin_inset space ~
37083 of the current document.
37084 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37087 \begin_layout Subsection
37091 \begin_layout Standard
37092 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37093 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37094 to jump, for example, between section
37095 \begin_inset space ~
37099 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37100 \begin_inset space ~
37103 2.5 and use the submenu
37106 \begin_inset space ~
37110 \begin_inset space ~
37117 \begin_inset space ~
37123 \begin_inset space ~
37127 \begin_inset space ~
37133 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37137 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37143 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37146 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37149 \begin_layout Standard
37150 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37154 \begin_inset space ~
37159 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37162 \begin_inset space ~
37167 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37170 \begin_layout Subsection
37171 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37174 \begin_layout Standard
37175 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37179 \begin_layout Subsection
37183 \begin_layout Standard
37184 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37185 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37186 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37190 \begin_inset space ~
37194 \begin_inset space ~
37202 \begin_layout Subsection
37206 \begin_layout Standard
37207 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37210 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37212 \begin_inset space ~
37220 \begin_inset space ~
37225 manual for a detailed description.
37228 \begin_layout Section
37230 \begin_inset Index idx
37233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37242 \begin_layout Subsection
37246 \begin_layout Standard
37247 Change Tracking is described in section
37248 \begin_inset space ~
37252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37254 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37261 \begin_layout Subsection
37266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37276 \begin_layout Standard
37277 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
37279 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
37280 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37281 to the clipboard or update the view.
37282 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
37285 \begin_layout Subsection
37286 Start Appendix Here
37289 \begin_layout Standard
37290 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37291 as described in section
37292 \begin_inset space ~
37296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37298 reference "sec:Appendices"
37305 \begin_layout Subsection
37307 \begin_inset space ~
37313 \begin_layout Standard
37314 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37315 default output format for the document (menu
37317 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37318 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37319 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37321 \begin_inset space ~
37325 \begin_inset space ~
37331 \begin_inset space ~
37335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37337 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37341 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
37343 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37344 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37346 \begin_inset space ~
37349 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37351 \begin_inset space ~
37354 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37356 \begin_inset space ~
37360 \begin_inset space ~
37366 \begin_inset space ~
37370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37372 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37376 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37377 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37379 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37380 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37382 \begin_inset space ~
37385 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37387 \begin_inset space ~
37390 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37394 \begin_inset space ~
37398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37400 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37405 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37406 The default output format is
37409 \begin_inset space ~
37417 \begin_layout Subsection
37418 View (Other Formats)
37421 \begin_layout Standard
37422 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37423 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37424 actual document with an external program.
37425 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37426 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
37427 All possible formats are listed in section
37428 \begin_inset space ~
37432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37434 reference "sub:Export"
37439 You should at least see the menu entry
37444 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
37445 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
37446 \begin_inset space ~
37450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37452 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37457 \begin_inset Index idx
37460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37461 Reconfiguration of LyX
37469 \begin_layout Standard
37470 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37471 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37473 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37474 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37476 \begin_inset space ~
37479 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37481 \begin_inset space ~
37484 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37488 \begin_inset space ~
37492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37494 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37499 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37502 \begin_layout Subsection
37504 \begin_inset space ~
37510 \begin_layout Standard
37511 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37512 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37515 \begin_layout Subsection
37516 Update (Other Formats)
37519 \begin_layout Standard
37520 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37521 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37524 \begin_layout Subsection
37525 View Master Document
37528 \begin_layout Standard
37529 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37545 \begin_inset space ~
37550 manual for more information on this topic).
37551 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37552 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37556 \begin_inset space ~
37560 \begin_inset space ~
37565 generates the output of the whole book, while
37569 will just output the chapter alone.
37572 \begin_layout Standard
37573 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37574 in the document settings (menu
37576 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37577 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37578 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37580 \begin_inset space ~
37584 \begin_inset space ~
37590 \begin_inset space ~
37594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37596 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37600 ) or in the preferences (menu
37602 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37603 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37605 \begin_inset space ~
37608 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37610 \begin_inset space ~
37613 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37615 \begin_inset space ~
37619 \begin_inset space ~
37625 \begin_inset space ~
37629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37631 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37638 \begin_layout Subsection
37639 Update Master Document
37642 \begin_layout Standard
37643 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37659 \begin_inset space ~
37664 manual for more information on this topic).
37665 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37666 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37669 \begin_layout Standard
37670 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37671 in the document settings (menu
37673 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37674 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37675 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37677 \begin_inset space ~
37681 \begin_inset space ~
37687 \begin_inset space ~
37691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37693 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37697 ) or in the preferences (menu
37699 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37700 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37702 \begin_inset space ~
37705 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37707 \begin_inset space ~
37710 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37712 \begin_inset space ~
37716 \begin_inset space ~
37722 \begin_inset space ~
37726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37728 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37735 \begin_layout Subsection
37739 \begin_layout Standard
37740 Un/compresses the current document.
37743 \begin_layout Subsection
37747 \begin_layout Standard
37748 The document settings are described in appendix
37749 \begin_inset space ~
37753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37755 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37762 \begin_layout Section
37764 \begin_inset Index idx
37767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37776 \begin_layout Subsection
37780 \begin_layout Standard
37781 Spell checking is explained in section
37782 \begin_inset space ~
37786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37788 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37795 \begin_layout Subsection
37799 \begin_layout Standard
37800 The thesaurus is described in section
37801 \begin_inset space ~
37805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37807 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37814 \begin_layout Subsection
37816 \begin_inset Index idx
37819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37826 \begin_inset Index idx
37829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37838 \begin_layout Standard
37839 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37840 the highlighted document part.
37843 \begin_layout Subsection
37848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37856 \begin_inset Index idx
37859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37868 \begin_layout Standard
37869 Generates with the help of the program
37873 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37874 This feature is not available on Windows.
37877 \begin_layout Subsection
37882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37890 \begin_inset Index idx
37893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37902 \begin_layout Standard
37903 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37908 \begin_inset space ~
37913 to see the full filename paths.
37916 \begin_layout Subsection
37918 \begin_inset Index idx
37921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37930 \begin_layout Standard
37931 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37932 \begin_inset space ~
37936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37938 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37945 \begin_layout Subsection
37947 \begin_inset Index idx
37950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37951 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37962 Reconfiguration of LyX
37966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37979 \begin_inset Index idx
37982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37983 Reconfiguration of LyX
37991 \begin_layout Standard
37992 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37993 needs; see also section
37994 \begin_inset space ~
37998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38000 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38007 \begin_layout Subsection
38011 \begin_layout Standard
38016 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38017 \begin_inset space ~
38021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38023 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38030 \begin_layout Section
38032 \begin_inset Index idx
38035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38044 \begin_layout Standard
38045 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
38047 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38051 \begin_layout Standard
38055 \begin_inset space ~
38060 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
38061 found by LyX (see also section
38062 \begin_inset space ~
38066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38068 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38075 \begin_layout Standard
38079 \begin_inset space ~
38086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38095 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
38099 \begin_layout Section
38101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38103 name "sec:Toolbars"
38110 \begin_layout Standard
38111 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38112 \begin_inset space ~
38116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38118 reference "sub:Toolbars"
38125 \begin_layout Standard
38126 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38127 This is described in the
38129 Additional Features
38134 \begin_layout Subsection
38136 \begin_inset Index idx
38139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38148 \begin_layout Standard
38149 \begin_inset Graphics
38150 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38158 \begin_layout Standard
38159 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38165 \begin_layout Standard
38166 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38183 \begin_inset Note Note
38186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38187 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38192 manual for more information.
38200 \begin_layout Standard
38201 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38207 \begin_layout Standard
38208 \begin_inset Tabular
38209 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38210 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38211 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38212 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38218 \begin_inset Graphics
38219 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38233 pull-down box for the environments
38246 \begin_layout Standard
38247 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38253 \begin_layout Standard
38255 \begin_inset Tabular
38256 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38257 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38258 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38259 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38260 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38283 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38290 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38313 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38320 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38343 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38350 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38359 arg "dialog-show print"
38367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38373 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38380 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38389 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38403 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38410 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38433 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38440 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38463 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38470 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38493 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38500 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38523 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38530 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38553 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38560 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38569 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38583 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38593 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38609 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38623 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38629 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38642 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38651 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38665 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38666 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38673 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38694 Emphasize text, function of the
38696 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38698 \begin_inset space ~
38701 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38710 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38731 Set text to noun style, function of the
38733 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38735 \begin_inset space ~
38738 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38747 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38756 arg "textstyle-apply"
38764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38768 Format text using the current settings in the
38770 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38772 \begin_inset space ~
38775 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38807 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38808 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38810 \begin_inset space ~
38819 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38828 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38842 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38849 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38856 arg "tabular-insert"
38864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38870 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38877 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38886 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38898 Toggle outline window on/off,
38900 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38907 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38916 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38928 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38943 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38955 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38968 \begin_layout Subsection
38970 \begin_inset Index idx
38973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38982 \begin_layout Standard
38983 \begin_inset Graphics
38984 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38992 \begin_layout Standard
38993 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38999 \begin_layout Standard
39000 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39004 \begin_layout Standard
39005 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39011 \begin_layout Standard
39012 \begin_inset Tabular
39013 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39014 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39015 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39016 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39017 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39044 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39053 arg "layout Enumerate"
39061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39071 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39080 arg "layout Itemize"
39088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39098 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39125 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39134 arg "layout Description"
39142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39152 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39161 arg "depth-increment"
39169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39175 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39177 \begin_inset space ~
39181 \begin_inset space ~
39190 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39199 arg "depth-decrement"
39207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39213 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39215 \begin_inset space ~
39219 \begin_inset space ~
39228 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39237 arg "float-insert figure"
39245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39251 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39252 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39259 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39268 arg "float-insert table"
39276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39282 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39283 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39290 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39313 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39320 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39329 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39343 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39350 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39359 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39373 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39380 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39403 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39405 \begin_inset space ~
39414 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39423 arg "nomencl-insert"
39431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39437 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39439 \begin_inset space ~
39448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39457 arg "footnote-insert"
39465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39471 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39478 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39487 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39501 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39503 \begin_inset space ~
39512 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39535 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39536 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39549 \begin_inset space ~
39558 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39567 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39581 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39588 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39611 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39618 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39641 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39658 \begin_inset space ~
39667 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39676 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39690 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39691 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39698 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39707 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39721 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39722 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39724 \begin_inset space ~
39733 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39742 arg "dialog-show character"
39750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39756 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39758 \begin_inset space ~
39761 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39768 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39777 arg "layout-paragraph"
39785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39791 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39793 \begin_inset space ~
39802 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39811 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39825 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39839 \begin_layout Subsection
39840 View/Update Toolbar
39841 \begin_inset Index idx
39844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39845 Toolbar ! View / Update
39853 \begin_layout Standard
39854 \begin_inset Graphics
39855 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39862 \begin_layout Standard
39863 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39869 \begin_layout Standard
39870 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39874 \begin_layout Standard
39875 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39881 \begin_layout Standard
39882 \begin_inset Tabular
39883 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39884 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39885 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39886 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39887 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39910 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39917 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39926 arg "buffer-update"
39934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39940 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39956 arg "master-buffer-view"
39964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39970 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39972 \begin_inset space ~
39981 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39990 arg "master-buffer-update"
39998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40004 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40006 \begin_inset space ~
40010 \begin_inset space ~
40019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40028 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40042 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40043 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40044 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40045 Synchronize with Output
40051 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40056 \begin_inset Graphics
40057 filename ../images/view-others.png
40059 groupId toolbarbuttons
40070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40076 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40077 View (Other Formats)
40083 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40088 \begin_inset Graphics
40089 filename ../images/update-others.png
40091 groupId toolbarbuttons
40100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40106 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40107 Update (Other Formats)
40120 \begin_layout Standard
40121 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40125 \begin_layout Subsection
40129 \begin_layout Standard
40130 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40131 \begin_inset space ~
40135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40137 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40141 , the table toolbar
40142 \begin_inset Index idx
40145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40154 \begin_inset space ~
40159 manual and the math macro toolbar
40160 \begin_inset Index idx
40163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40176 \begin_layout Chapter
40177 The Document Settings
40178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40180 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40185 \begin_inset Index idx
40188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40189 Document ! Settings
40197 \begin_layout Standard
40201 \begin_inset space ~
40206 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40207 is called with the menu
40209 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40213 You can save your document settings as default with the
40215 Save as Document Defaults
40217 button in any dialog.
40218 This will create a template named
40222 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
40226 \begin_layout Standard
40231 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40232 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40235 \begin_layout Standard
40236 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40237 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40238 to find the one you are looking for.
40239 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40240 the submenus of the dialog.
40242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40246 \begin_inset space \space{}
40250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40257 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40258 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40259 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40262 \begin_layout Section
40266 \begin_layout Standard
40267 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40269 Document classes are described in section
40270 \begin_inset space ~
40274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40276 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40284 \begin_layout Standard
40288 \begin_inset space ~
40293 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
40297 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
40298 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40300 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40309 \begin_layout Standard
40310 Some classes use special class options by default.
40311 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40315 and you can decide to use them or not.
40316 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40317 recommended you leave them untouched.
40322 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40327 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
40328 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40334 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40335 \begin_inset Newline newline
40340 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40343 \begin_inset Newline newline
40346 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
40352 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40354 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40366 \begin_layout Standard
40371 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40372 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
40373 document is opened without its master.
40374 This way child documents are always compilable.
40375 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40382 \begin_inset space ~
40390 \begin_layout Standard
40391 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
40401 \begin_inset Index idx
40404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40405 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
40411 \begin_inset Index idx
40414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40415 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
40420 for cross-references, see section
40421 \begin_inset space ~
40425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40427 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40434 \begin_layout Section
40438 \begin_layout Standard
40439 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40440 Please refer to the section
40443 \begin_inset space ~
40451 \begin_inset space ~
40456 manual for details.
40459 \begin_layout Section
40463 \begin_layout Standard
40464 Modules are explained in section
40465 \begin_inset space ~
40469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40471 reference "sub:Modules"
40478 \begin_layout Section
40482 \begin_layout Standard
40484 \begin_inset space ~
40488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40490 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40497 \begin_layout Section
40501 \begin_layout Standard
40502 The document font settings are described in section
40503 \begin_inset space ~
40507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40509 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40516 \begin_layout Section
40520 \begin_layout Standard
40521 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40533 \begin_inset space ~
40538 and whether it should be a
40541 \begin_inset space ~
40546 can also be specified here.
40549 \begin_layout Standard
40550 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40552 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40554 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40557 \begin_layout Standard
40560 Use justification in LyX work area
40562 you can decide if LyX justifies the text on screen.
40563 This only affects the text inside LyX not in the output.
40566 \begin_layout Section
40570 \begin_layout Standard
40571 This dialog is described in sections
40572 \begin_inset space ~
40576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40578 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40585 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40592 \begin_layout Section
40596 \begin_layout Standard
40597 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40598 \begin_inset space ~
40602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40604 reference "sub:Margins"
40611 \begin_layout Section
40613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40615 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40620 \begin_inset Index idx
40623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40624 Language ! Encoding
40632 \begin_layout Standard
40633 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40634 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40635 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40636 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40637 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40638 known for a particular character).
40641 \begin_layout Standard
40642 If you use the option
40646 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40647 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40648 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40649 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40650 exactly one encoding.
40651 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40654 \begin_layout Standard
40655 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40656 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40657 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40658 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40659 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40660 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40665 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40666 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40667 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40668 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40669 engines to standard LaTeX.
40670 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40671 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40674 \begin_inset space ~
40681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40693 \begin_inset space ~
40700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40712 \begin_inset space ~
40718 \begin_inset space ~
40722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40724 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40729 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40733 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40736 \begin_layout Standard
40740 \begin_inset space ~
40745 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40755 The possible settings are:
40758 \begin_layout Description
40759 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40761 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40762 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40766 \begin_inset space ~
40770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40772 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40779 \begin_layout Description
40780 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40781 format you will use.
40782 In many cases this will be
40787 \begin_inset Index idx
40790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40791 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40797 If the newer package
40802 \begin_inset Index idx
40805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40806 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40811 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40812 this package will be used instead of
40819 \begin_layout Description
40821 \begin_inset space ~
40832 would be more appropriate.
40835 \begin_layout Description
40836 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40837 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40841 (for German texts), type in
40844 \begin_inset Newline newline
40849 usepackage{ngerman}
40852 \begin_layout Description
40853 None will not use a language package.
40854 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40857 \begin_layout Standard
40858 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40861 \begin_layout Description
40863 \begin_inset space ~
40867 \begin_inset space ~
40871 \begin_inset space ~
40878 , but the LaTeX-package
40883 \begin_inset Index idx
40886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40887 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40893 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40894 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40895 languages in TeX code.
40898 \begin_layout Description
40899 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40900 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40901 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40904 \begin_layout Description
40906 \begin_inset space ~
40910 \begin_inset space ~
40913 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40916 \begin_layout Description
40918 \begin_inset space ~
40922 \begin_inset space ~
40925 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40928 \begin_layout Description
40930 \begin_inset space ~
40933 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40936 \begin_layout Description
40938 \begin_inset space ~
40942 \begin_inset space ~
40945 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40946 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40949 \begin_layout Description
40951 \begin_inset space ~
40955 \begin_inset space ~
40958 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40962 \begin_layout Description
40964 \begin_inset space ~
40968 \begin_inset space ~
40971 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40972 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40975 \begin_layout Description
40977 \begin_inset space ~
40981 \begin_inset space ~
40985 \begin_inset space ~
40988 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40989 \begin_inset space ~
40995 \begin_layout Description
40997 \begin_inset space ~
41001 \begin_inset space ~
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41008 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41009 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41012 \begin_layout Description
41014 \begin_inset space ~
41018 \begin_inset space ~
41021 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41022 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41023 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41024 \begin_inset space ~
41028 \begin_inset space ~
41034 \begin_layout Description
41036 \begin_inset space ~
41040 \begin_inset space ~
41043 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41044 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41045 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
41046 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41047 \begin_inset space ~
41051 \begin_inset space ~
41057 \begin_layout Description
41059 \begin_inset space ~
41063 \begin_inset space ~
41066 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41069 \begin_layout Description
41071 \begin_inset space ~
41075 \begin_inset space ~
41078 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41081 \begin_layout Description
41083 \begin_inset space ~
41087 \begin_inset space ~
41090 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41093 \begin_layout Description
41095 \begin_inset space ~
41098 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41101 \begin_layout Description
41103 \begin_inset space ~
41106 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41109 \begin_layout Description
41111 \begin_inset space ~
41115 \begin_inset space ~
41118 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41121 \begin_layout Description
41123 \begin_inset space ~
41127 \begin_inset space ~
41133 \begin_layout Description
41135 \begin_inset space ~
41139 \begin_inset space ~
41142 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41145 \begin_layout Description
41147 \begin_inset space ~
41151 \begin_inset space ~
41157 \begin_layout Description
41159 \begin_inset space ~
41163 \begin_inset space ~
41166 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41171 \begin_inset Index idx
41174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41175 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41180 , when using this, set the document language to
41185 \begin_layout Description
41187 \begin_inset space ~
41191 \begin_inset space ~
41194 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41198 , when using this, set the document language to
41201 \begin_inset space ~
41207 \begin_layout Description
41209 \begin_inset space ~
41213 \begin_inset space ~
41216 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41221 \begin_inset Index idx
41224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41225 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
41230 , when using this, set the document language to
41235 \begin_layout Description
41237 \begin_inset space ~
41241 \begin_inset space ~
41244 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41248 , when using this, set the document language to
41253 \begin_layout Description
41255 \begin_inset space ~
41259 \begin_inset space ~
41262 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41266 , when using this, set the document language to
41271 \begin_layout Description
41273 \begin_inset space ~
41276 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41279 \begin_layout Description
41281 \begin_inset space ~
41285 \begin_inset space ~
41289 \begin_inset space ~
41292 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41295 \begin_layout Description
41297 \begin_inset space ~
41301 \begin_inset space ~
41305 \begin_inset space ~
41308 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41309 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41310 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41313 \begin_layout Description
41315 \begin_inset space ~
41319 \begin_inset space ~
41325 \begin_layout Description
41327 \begin_inset space ~
41331 \begin_inset space ~
41334 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41335 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41338 \begin_layout Description
41340 \begin_inset space ~
41344 \begin_inset space ~
41347 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
41352 \begin_inset Index idx
41355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41356 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41361 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41364 \begin_layout Description
41366 \begin_inset space ~
41370 \begin_inset space ~
41373 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41381 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
41386 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
41388 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41391 \begin_layout Description
41393 \begin_inset space ~
41397 \begin_inset space ~
41400 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41405 \begin_inset Index idx
41408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41409 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
41414 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41417 \begin_layout Description
41419 \begin_inset space ~
41422 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41427 \begin_inset Index idx
41430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41431 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
41437 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41441 \begin_layout Description
41443 \begin_inset space ~
41447 \begin_inset space ~
41451 \begin_inset space ~
41454 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41455 \begin_inset space ~
41461 \begin_layout Description
41463 \begin_inset space ~
41467 \begin_inset space ~
41471 \begin_inset space ~
41474 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41475 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41476 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41480 \begin_layout Description
41482 \begin_inset space ~
41486 \begin_inset space ~
41490 \begin_inset space ~
41493 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41494 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41497 \begin_layout Section
41499 \begin_inset Index idx
41502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41509 \begin_inset Index idx
41512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41519 \begin_inset Index idx
41522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41523 Color ! Shaded boxes
41529 \begin_inset Index idx
41532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41533 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41541 \begin_layout Standard
41542 Here you can alter the font color for the
41546 (default: black), for
41549 \begin_inset space ~
41554 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41558 (default: white) and for
41561 \begin_inset space ~
41571 sets the color back to the default.
41574 \begin_layout Standard
41575 Clicking any button showing
41583 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41584 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41585 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41586 later more quickly.
41589 \begin_layout Standard
41590 Note, if you change the
41593 \begin_inset space ~
41598 font color and use the option
41601 \begin_inset space ~
41606 in the document settings under
41609 \begin_inset space ~
41614 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41615 \begin_inset space ~
41619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41621 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41628 \begin_layout Standard
41629 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41635 \begin_layout Standard
41639 \begin_inset space ~
41648 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41650 \begin_inset space ~
41653 Code after a forced page break:
41656 \begin_layout Itemize
41657 For the page color:
41658 \begin_inset Newline newline
41665 pagecolor{color name}
41668 \begin_layout Itemize
41669 For the text color:
41670 \begin_inset Newline newline
41680 \begin_layout Standard
41681 You are restricted to one of
41717 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41724 \begin_inset space ~
41730 \begin_inset Newline newline
41733 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41734 names to refer to them:
41737 \begin_layout Itemize
41743 \begin_inset Newline newline
41748 page_backgroundcolor
41751 \begin_layout Itemize
41755 \begin_inset space ~
41761 \begin_inset Newline newline
41769 \begin_layout Itemize
41773 \begin_inset space ~
41779 \begin_inset Newline newline
41787 \begin_layout Itemize
41791 \begin_inset space ~
41797 \begin_inset Newline newline
41805 \begin_layout Standard
41806 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41817 \begin_inset space ~
41825 \begin_layout Section
41829 \begin_layout Standard
41830 Here you can adjust the
41834 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41838 as described in section
41839 \begin_inset space ~
41843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41845 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41852 \begin_layout Section
41856 \begin_layout Standard
41857 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41862 \begin_inset Index idx
41865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41866 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41876 \begin_inset Index idx
41879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41880 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41888 Sectioned bibliography
41890 using the LaTeX package
41895 \begin_inset Index idx
41898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41899 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41904 and you can select a
41908 for the generation of the bibliography.
41909 For a further description see section
41910 \begin_inset space ~
41914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41916 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41923 \begin_layout Section
41927 \begin_layout Standard
41928 Here you can define the
41932 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41934 \begin_inset space ~
41938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41940 reference "sec:Index"
41947 \begin_layout Section
41951 \begin_layout Standard
41952 The PDF properties are explained in section
41953 \begin_inset space ~
41957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41959 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41966 \begin_layout Section
41970 \begin_layout Standard
41971 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41976 \begin_inset Index idx
41979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41980 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41990 \begin_inset Index idx
41993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41994 LaTeX-packages ! amssymb
42004 \begin_inset Index idx
42007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42008 LaTeX-packages ! cancel
42018 \begin_inset Index idx
42021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42022 LaTeX-packages ! esint
42032 \begin_inset Index idx
42035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42036 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
42046 \begin_inset Index idx
42049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42050 LaTeX-packages ! mathtools
42060 \begin_inset Index idx
42063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42064 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
42074 \begin_inset Index idx
42077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42078 LaTeX-packages ! stackrel
42088 \begin_inset Index idx
42091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42092 LaTeX-packages ! stmaryrd
42102 \begin_inset Index idx
42105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42106 LaTeX-packages ! undertilde
42111 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42114 \begin_layout Description
42115 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
42116 ensure that you have this enabled.
42119 \begin_layout Description
42120 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42121 letters, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas, ensure that you have
42125 \begin_layout Description
42126 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42129 \begin_inset space ~
42141 \begin_layout Description
42142 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42145 \begin_inset space ~
42157 \begin_layout Description
42158 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42169 \begin_layout Description
42170 mathtools is used for the math commands
42206 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42213 \begin_layout Description
42214 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42216 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42225 \begin_layout Description
42226 stackrel is used for the math command
42243 \begin_layout Description
42244 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42247 \begin_layout Description
42248 undertilde is used for the math command
42256 Accents for one Character
42265 \begin_layout Section
42269 \begin_layout Standard
42270 The float placement options are described in the section
42273 \begin_inset space ~
42281 \begin_inset space ~
42289 \begin_layout Section
42293 \begin_layout Standard
42294 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42296 Program Code Listings
42301 \begin_inset space ~
42309 \begin_layout Section
42313 \begin_layout Standard
42314 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42322 set to be used and set the
42327 The itemize environment is described in section
42328 \begin_inset space ~
42332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42334 reference "sec:Itemize"
42341 \begin_layout Standard
42342 You can furthermore specify a
42345 \begin_inset space ~
42350 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
42351 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42358 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42360 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42364 \begin_inset space \space{}
42368 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42378 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42379 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42382 \begin_layout Standard
42383 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42391 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
42394 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42395 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42397 \begin_inset space ~
42403 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42407 usepackage{textcomp}
42410 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42414 usepackage{amssymb}
42424 \begin_layout Section
42428 \begin_layout Standard
42429 Branches are described in section
42430 \begin_inset space ~
42434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42436 reference "sec:Branches"
42443 \begin_layout Section
42445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42447 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42454 \begin_layout Standard
42455 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42458 \begin_layout Description
42460 \begin_inset space ~
42464 \begin_inset space ~
42467 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42487 View Master Document
42488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42495 Update Master Document
42496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42503 menu or the toolbar.
42504 The default is set in
42506 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42507 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42509 \begin_inset space ~
42512 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42516 \begin_inset space ~
42520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42522 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42529 \begin_layout Description
42531 \begin_inset space ~
42535 \begin_inset space ~
42538 Output settings for the menu
42540 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42542 \begin_inset space ~
42548 For a detailed description see section
42550 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42555 \begin_inset space ~
42563 \begin_layout Description
42565 \begin_inset space ~
42569 \begin_inset space ~
42572 Options offers settings for the export format
42578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42591 \begin_inset space ~
42596 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42597 \begin_inset space ~
42600 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42604 \begin_inset space ~
42609 settings are described in detail in section
42611 Math Output in XHTML
42616 \begin_inset space ~
42625 \begin_inset space ~
42629 \begin_inset space ~
42634 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42637 \begin_layout Section
42642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42652 \begin_layout Standard
42653 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42654 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42655 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42656 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42660 \begin_layout Standard
42661 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42662 \begin_inset space ~
42666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42668 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42675 \begin_layout Chapter
42681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42683 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42688 \begin_inset Index idx
42691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42700 \begin_layout Standard
42701 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42703 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42707 It has the following submenus.
42710 \begin_layout Section
42714 \begin_layout Subsection
42718 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42719 User Interface File
42720 \begin_inset Index idx
42723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42724 Customization ! of toolbars
42730 \begin_inset Index idx
42733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42734 Customization ! of menus
42742 \begin_layout Standard
42743 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42744 interface (ui) file.
42745 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42753 \begin_layout Description
42758 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42761 \begin_layout Description
42768 the menu entries in popup context menus
42771 \begin_layout Description
42776 specifies the toolbar buttons
42779 \begin_layout Standard
42780 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42781 and edit the entries.
42784 \begin_layout Standard
42785 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42797 entries must be finished with an explicit
42822 and in the case of the
42823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42835 The syntax for the entries is:
42838 \begin_layout Standard
42839 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42867 \begin_layout Standard
42869 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42872 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42874 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42887 \begin_inset space ~
42895 \begin_layout Standard
42896 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42902 \begin_layout Standard
42903 For example, assuming you use the menu
42905 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42908 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42912 \begin_layout Standard
42913 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42937 \begin_layout Standard
42939 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42954 to have the sixth bookmark.
42957 \begin_layout Standard
42961 \begin_inset space ~
42966 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42967 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42968 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42971 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42982 \begin_layout Standard
42985 Enable tool tips in main work area
42987 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42991 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42995 \begin_layout Standard
43000 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
43003 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43005 \begin_inset space ~
43013 \begin_layout Subsection
43017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43021 \begin_layout Standard
43024 Restore window layouts and geometries
43026 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
43027 in the last LyX session.
43030 \begin_layout Standard
43033 Restore cursor positions
43035 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43039 \begin_layout Standard
43042 Load opened files from last session
43044 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
43047 \begin_layout Standard
43050 Clear all session information
43052 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
43053 of last opened documents, etc.).
43056 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43060 name "sub:Backup documents"
43065 \begin_inset Index idx
43068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43077 \begin_layout Standard
43080 Backup original documents when saving
43082 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43083 it was saved the last time.
43084 It is stored in the
43087 \begin_inset space ~
43093 \begin_inset space ~
43097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43099 reference "sec:Paths"
43103 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43106 \begin_inset space ~
43112 The backup file has the file extension
43113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43127 \begin_layout Standard
43130 Backup documents, every
43132 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43135 \begin_layout Standard
43138 Save documents compressed by default
43140 always saves files in a compressed format.
43143 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43144 Windows & work area
43147 \begin_layout Standard
43150 Open documents in tabs
43152 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
43155 \begin_layout Standard
43160 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
43164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43172 reference "sec:Paths"
43176 for information about LyXServer pipes.
43182 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
43184 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
43187 \begin_layout Standard
43190 Single close-tab button
43192 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43195 \begin_inset Graphics
43196 filename ../images/closetab.png
43203 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43204 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43207 \begin_layout Standard
43208 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43216 For this option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
43224 \begin_layout Standard
43229 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43231 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43233 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43237 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43238 instances of LyX and only want to close the view in once instance.
43241 \begin_layout Subsection
43243 \begin_inset Index idx
43246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43255 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
43262 \begin_layout Standard
43263 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
43266 \begin_layout Standard
43267 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43275 This section only deals with the fonts
43280 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43283 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43284 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43295 \begin_layout Standard
43296 By default, LyX uses
43312 (depends on the system) as its
43315 \begin_inset space ~
43331 \begin_layout Standard
43332 You can change the font size with the
43339 \begin_layout Standard
43344 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43349 points have the size of 1
43350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43354 \begin_inset space ~
43358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43360 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43365 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43366 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43370 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43371 \begin_inset space ~
43375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43377 reference "sub:Document-Font"
43384 \begin_layout Standard
43387 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43389 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
43390 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43391 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43392 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43394 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43395 \begin_inset space ~
43401 \begin_layout Subsection
43403 \begin_inset Index idx
43406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43413 \begin_inset Index idx
43416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43425 \begin_layout Standard
43426 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
43427 the list and selecting the
43434 \begin_layout Standard
43435 By checking the option
43439 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43442 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43443 \begin_inset space ~
43447 \begin_inset space ~
43452 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43455 \begin_layout Subsection
43457 \begin_inset Index idx
43460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43469 \begin_layout Standard
43470 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
43473 \begin_layout Standard
43478 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43479 This feature is described in section
43480 \begin_inset space ~
43484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43486 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43493 \begin_layout Standard
43494 Checking the option
43497 \begin_inset space ~
43501 \begin_inset space ~
43505 \begin_inset space ~
43510 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43513 \begin_layout Section
43515 \begin_inset Index idx
43518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43527 \begin_layout Subsection
43531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43535 \begin_layout Standard
43538 Cursor follows scrollbar
43540 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43544 \begin_layout Standard
43545 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43546 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43547 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43550 \begin_layout Standard
43553 Scroll below end of document
43555 is self-explanatory.
43558 \begin_layout Standard
43559 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
43566 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43568 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43569 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43572 \begin_layout Standard
43575 Sort environments alphabetically
43577 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43580 \begin_layout Standard
43583 Group environments by their category
43585 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43588 \begin_layout Standard
43593 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43608 \begin_layout Standard
43609 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43614 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43615 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43619 \begin_layout Subsection
43621 \begin_inset Index idx
43624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43631 \begin_inset Index idx
43634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43635 Settings ! Shortcuts
43643 \begin_layout Standard
43648 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43649 Several binding files are available, among them:
43652 \begin_layout Description
43653 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43656 \begin_layout Description
43657 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43669 \begin_layout Description
43670 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43673 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43681 \begin_layout Standard
43682 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43687 , and binding files for special languages.
43688 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43689 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43693 \begin_inset space \space{}
43697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43705 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43709 \begin_layout Standard
43710 Some binding files, like
43714 , only have a limited scope.
43715 When looking at the end of the file
43719 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43722 \begin_layout Standard
43726 \begin_inset space ~
43730 \begin_inset space ~
43735 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43736 in the selected key binding file.
43739 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43743 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43748 \begin_inset Index idx
43751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43752 Key Bindings ! Editing
43760 \begin_layout Standard
43761 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43762 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43763 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43766 Show key-bindings containing
43769 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43770 Insert there for example as keyword
43771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43778 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43779 functions that contain
43780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43788 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43789 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43793 that you will find in the
43800 \begin_layout Standard
43801 For example, to add the shortcut
43809 , select the function and press the
43814 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43815 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43818 \begin_layout Standard
43819 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43820 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43821 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43822 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43823 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43828 \begin_layout Standard
43829 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43832 \begin_layout Standard
43833 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43835 The syntax of the entries is:
43838 \begin_layout Standard
43844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43862 \begin_layout Subsection
43864 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43866 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43871 \begin_inset Index idx
43874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43881 \begin_inset Index idx
43884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43885 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43893 \begin_layout Standard
43894 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43895 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43896 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43897 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43900 \begin_inset space ~
43904 \begin_inset space ~
43909 and select the keyboard map file named
43916 \begin_layout Standard
43925 keyboard map and, if you use the
43929 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43932 arg "keymap-primary"
43938 arg "keymap-secondary"
43941 respectively or toggle between them with
43944 arg "keymap-toggle"
43950 \begin_layout Standard
43951 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43959 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43968 \begin_layout Standard
43969 You can also specify the mouse
43971 Wheel scrolling speed
43974 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43978 \begin_layout Standard
43986 \begin_inset space ~
43990 \begin_inset space ~
43995 you can select a key for zooming.
43996 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43999 \begin_layout Subsection
44003 \begin_layout Standard
44004 Input completion is described in section
44005 \begin_inset space ~
44009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44011 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44018 \begin_layout Section
44020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44027 \begin_inset Index idx
44030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44037 \begin_inset Index idx
44040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44049 \begin_layout Standard
44050 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
44052 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44055 \begin_layout Description
44057 \begin_inset space ~
44060 directory This is LyX's working directory.
44061 It is the default when you
44072 \begin_inset space ~
44080 \begin_layout Description
44082 \begin_inset space ~
44085 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44087 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44089 \begin_inset space ~
44093 \begin_inset space ~
44101 \begin_layout Description
44103 \begin_inset space ~
44106 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44112 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44116 \begin_inset Newline newline
44120 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44132 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44140 \begin_layout Description
44142 \begin_inset space ~
44146 \begin_inset Index idx
44149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44155 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44156 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44157 \begin_inset space ~
44161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44163 reference "sub:Backup documents"
44171 will be used to save the backups.
44172 \begin_inset Newline newline
44175 Backup files have the ending
44176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44186 \begin_layout Description
44191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44199 \begin_inset space ~
44202 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44203 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
44204 \begin_inset Newline newline
44211 You add a BibTeX-database
44216 You can edit this file with the program
44225 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
44228 \begin_inset space ~
44234 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44239 and click on the LyX-symbol.
44240 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44246 and LyX need to be running the same time.
44247 \begin_inset Newline newline
44250 The pipe is also used for the
44255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44261 reference "sub:Backup documents"
44266 \begin_inset Newline newline
44269 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44270 \begin_inset Newline newline
44286 \begin_layout Description
44288 \begin_inset space ~
44291 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44294 \begin_layout Description
44296 \begin_inset space ~
44299 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44300 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44301 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44304 \begin_layout Description
44306 \begin_inset space ~
44309 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44315 You only need to specify it if you are using
44319 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44325 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44329 \begin_layout Description
44331 \begin_inset space ~
44334 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44335 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
44336 where to find it on the system.
44337 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
44338 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44347 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44348 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44351 \begin_layout Description
44353 \begin_inset space ~
44356 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44357 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
44359 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44361 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44362 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44363 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44364 scanned for the input files.
44365 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44366 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
44367 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44368 compilation may fail for some documents.
44371 \begin_layout Section
44375 \begin_layout Standard
44376 Here you can insert your
44385 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44387 \begin_inset space ~
44391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44393 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44397 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44400 \begin_layout Section
44402 \begin_inset Index idx
44405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44406 Language ! Settings
44412 \begin_inset Index idx
44415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44416 Settings ! Language
44424 \begin_layout Subsection
44426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44428 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
44435 \begin_layout Description
44437 \begin_inset space ~
44441 \begin_inset space ~
44444 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
44445 You can find its actual translation status here:
44446 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44448 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44455 \begin_layout Description
44457 \begin_inset space ~
44460 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
44462 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44463 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44480 The most widespread language package is
44485 \begin_inset Index idx
44488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44489 LaTeX-packages ! babel
44494 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
44495 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
44496 alternative language package
44501 \begin_inset Index idx
44504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44505 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
44510 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44511 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44517 The available selections are described in section
44518 \begin_inset space ~
44522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44524 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44531 \begin_layout Description
44533 \begin_inset space ~
44536 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
44537 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
44538 An example is the start command
44544 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44549 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44564 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44569 \begin_layout Description
44571 \begin_inset space ~
44579 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44580 command toggles the package on and off.
44583 \begin_layout Description
44585 \begin_inset space ~
44589 \begin_inset space ~
44592 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44596 \begin_layout Description
44598 \begin_inset space ~
44602 \begin_inset space ~
44605 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in LyX's dialogs.
44608 \begin_layout Description
44610 \begin_inset space ~
44614 \begin_inset space ~
44617 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44618 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44619 used by all LaTeX-packages.
44620 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44627 \begin_layout Description
44629 \begin_inset space ~
44632 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44634 When this option is not set, the
44637 \begin_inset space ~
44642 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
44643 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44646 \begin_inset space ~
44654 \begin_layout Description
44656 \begin_inset space ~
44662 \begin_inset space ~
44668 When it is not set, the
44671 \begin_inset space ~
44676 is set to the end of the document.
44679 \begin_layout Description
44681 \begin_inset space ~
44685 \begin_inset space ~
44688 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44689 language will be underlined in blue.
44692 \begin_layout Description
44694 \begin_inset space ~
44698 \begin_inset space ~
44701 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44702 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44705 \begin_layout Description
44707 \begin_inset space ~
44710 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44711 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44712 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44713 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44716 \begin_layout Subsection
44720 \begin_layout Standard
44721 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44722 \begin_inset space ~
44726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44728 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44735 \begin_layout Section
44739 \begin_layout Subsection
44743 \begin_layout Description
44745 \begin_inset space ~
44749 \begin_inset space ~
44752 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44755 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44756 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44758 \begin_inset space ~
44764 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44767 \begin_layout Description
44769 \begin_inset space ~
44773 \begin_inset Index idx
44776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44783 \begin_inset Index idx
44786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44787 Settings ! Date format
44792 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44793 \begin_inset Newline newline
44797 \begin_inset Flex URL
44800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44802 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44808 \begin_inset Newline newline
44811 For example the format
44812 \begin_inset Newline newline
44816 \begin_inset Newline newline
44819 prints the date as day/month/year.
44822 \begin_layout Description
44824 \begin_inset space ~
44828 \begin_inset space ~
44831 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44834 \begin_layout Description
44836 \begin_inset space ~
44839 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44841 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44843 \begin_inset space ~
44849 For a detailed description see section
44851 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44856 \begin_inset space ~
44864 \begin_layout Subsection
44866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44873 \begin_inset Index idx
44876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44883 \begin_inset Index idx
44886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44895 \begin_layout Description
44897 \begin_inset space ~
44900 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44905 The name will be used when the
44910 \begin_inset Newline newline
44914 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44922 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44930 \begin_layout Description
44932 \begin_inset space ~
44935 command is the command LyX
44936 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44943 LaTeX uses for printing.
44951 \begin_layout Description
44953 \begin_inset space ~
44957 \begin_inset space ~
44960 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44961 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44962 of the program that provides the
44969 \begin_layout Description
44971 \begin_inset space ~
44975 \begin_inset space ~
44979 \begin_inset space ~
44982 printer This option works only for the
44987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44999 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
45000 This is an option only for dvips experts.
45003 \begin_layout Subsection
45008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45018 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
45023 \begin_inset Index idx
45026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45035 \begin_layout Description
45037 \begin_inset space ~
45044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45052 \begin_inset space ~
45056 \begin_inset space ~
45059 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45064 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45085 are used for Cyrillic.
45086 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45099 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45100 LyX sets up in the background.
45101 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45104 \begin_layout Description
45106 \begin_inset space ~
45110 \begin_inset space ~
45113 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45118 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
45121 \begin_layout Description
45123 \begin_inset space ~
45127 \begin_inset space ~
45131 \begin_inset space ~
45135 \begin_inset space ~
45138 options They only have an effect when the program
45142 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45145 \begin_layout Standard
45146 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45147 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45148 manuals of the applications.
45151 \begin_layout Description
45153 \begin_inset space ~
45156 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45157 \begin_inset space ~
45161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45163 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
45170 \begin_layout Description
45172 \begin_inset space ~
45175 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45176 \begin_inset space ~
45180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45182 reference "sub:Index-Program"
45189 \begin_layout Description
45191 \begin_inset space ~
45194 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45195 \begin_inset space ~
45199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45201 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
45208 \begin_layout Description
45213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45221 \begin_inset space ~
45224 command Command for the program
45228 that is described in the section
45234 Additional Features
45239 \begin_layout Standard
45240 There are additionally the following options:
45243 \begin_layout Description
45245 \begin_inset space ~
45249 \begin_inset space ~
45253 \begin_inset space ~
45257 \begin_inset space ~
45261 \begin_inset space ~
45264 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45282 to separate folders.
45283 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
45284 \begin_inset Index idx
45287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45294 \begin_inset Index idx
45297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45306 \begin_layout Description
45308 \begin_inset space ~
45312 \begin_inset space ~
45316 \begin_inset space ~
45320 \begin_inset space ~
45324 \begin_inset space ~
45328 \begin_inset space ~
45331 changes Removes all manually set
45337 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45338 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45340 \begin_inset space ~
45345 dialog when changing the document class.
45348 \begin_layout Section
45350 \begin_inset space ~
45354 \begin_inset Index idx
45357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45366 \begin_layout Subsection
45368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45370 name "sub:Converters"
45375 \begin_inset Index idx
45378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45387 \begin_layout Standard
45388 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45389 from one format to another.
45390 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45391 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45398 \begin_inset space ~
45403 field and press the
45408 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45412 \begin_inset space ~
45417 drop-down list, modify the
45421 field and press the
45428 \begin_layout Standard
45431 Converter File Cache
45437 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45439 Maximum Age (in days
45442 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45443 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45446 \begin_layout Standard
45447 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45448 definition, is described in the section
45459 \begin_layout Subsection
45461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45463 name "sec:File-Formats"
45468 \begin_inset Index idx
45471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45478 \begin_inset Index idx
45481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45490 \begin_layout Standard
45491 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
45500 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45503 \begin_layout Standard
45504 You can also define the
45506 Default output format
45508 that is used when you use
45510 View, Update, View Master Document
45514 Update Master Document
45520 menu or the toolbar.
45523 \begin_layout Standard
45524 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45535 \begin_layout Standard
45536 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
45537 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45538 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45539 This is done by specifying a
45544 More about this is described in the section
45555 \begin_layout Chapter
45556 Units available in LyX
45557 \begin_inset Index idx
45560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45569 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45576 \begin_layout Standard
45578 \begin_inset space ~
45582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45584 reference "tab:Units"
45588 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
45591 \begin_layout Standard
45592 \begin_inset Float table
45598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45599 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45617 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45625 \begin_inset Tabular
45626 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45627 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
45628 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45629 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45780 scaled point (65536
45781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45841 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45896 % of original image width
45903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46110 \begin_layout Chapter
46112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46114 name "chap:Credits"
46121 \begin_layout Standard
46122 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46123 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46126 \begin_layout Itemize
46129 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46132 \begin_layout Itemize
46138 \begin_layout Itemize
46144 \begin_layout Itemize
46150 \begin_layout Itemize
46156 \begin_layout Itemize
46162 \begin_layout Itemize
46168 \begin_layout Itemize
46174 \begin_layout Itemize
46177 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46180 \begin_layout Itemize
46186 \begin_layout Itemize
46192 \begin_layout Itemize
46198 \begin_layout Itemize
46204 \begin_layout Itemize
46210 \begin_layout Itemize
46216 \begin_layout Itemize
46222 \begin_layout Itemize
46228 \begin_layout Itemize
46230 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46239 \begin_layout Standard
46240 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46243 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46250 \begin_layout Bibliography
46251 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46252 LatexCommand bibitem
46259 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46262 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46267 \begin_inset Newline newline
46271 \begin_inset Flex URL
46274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46276 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46284 \begin_layout Bibliography
46285 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46286 LatexCommand bibitem
46287 key "latexcompanion"
46291 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46293 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
46296 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46299 \begin_layout Bibliography
46300 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46301 LatexCommand bibitem
46306 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46309 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
46312 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46315 \begin_layout Bibliography
46316 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46317 LatexCommand bibitem
46324 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
46327 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46330 \begin_layout Bibliography
46331 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46332 LatexCommand bibitem
46344 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46347 \begin_layout Bibliography
46348 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46349 LatexCommand bibitem
46355 \begin_inset Newline newline
46359 \begin_inset Flex URL
46362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46364 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46372 \begin_layout Bibliography
46373 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46374 LatexCommand bibitem
46380 \begin_inset Newline newline
46384 \begin_inset Flex URL
46387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46389 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46397 \begin_layout Bibliography
46398 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46399 LatexCommand bibitem
46405 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46407 name "Documentation"
46408 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46417 \begin_inset Newline newline
46421 \begin_inset Flex URL
46424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46426 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46434 \begin_layout Bibliography
46435 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46436 LatexCommand bibitem
46442 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46444 name "Documentation"
46445 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46449 how to use the program
46454 \begin_inset Newline newline
46458 \begin_inset Flex URL
46461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46463 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46471 \begin_layout Bibliography
46472 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46473 LatexCommand bibitem
46479 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46481 name "Documentation"
46482 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46491 \begin_inset Newline newline
46495 \begin_inset Flex URL
46498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46500 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46508 \begin_layout Bibliography
46509 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46510 LatexCommand bibitem
46516 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46518 name "Documentation"
46519 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46528 \begin_inset Newline newline
46532 \begin_inset Flex URL
46535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46537 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46545 \begin_layout Bibliography
46546 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46547 LatexCommand bibitem
46553 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46555 name "Documentation"
46556 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46560 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
46561 \begin_inset Newline newline
46565 \begin_inset Flex URL
46568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46570 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46578 \begin_layout Bibliography
46579 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46580 LatexCommand bibitem
46586 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46588 name "Documentation"
46589 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46593 of the LaTeX-package
46598 \begin_inset Index idx
46601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46602 LaTeX-packages ! caption
46608 \begin_inset Newline newline
46612 \begin_inset Flex URL
46615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46617 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46625 \begin_layout Bibliography
46626 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46627 LatexCommand bibitem
46633 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46635 name "Documentation"
46636 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46640 of the LaTeX-package
46645 \begin_inset Index idx
46648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46649 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46655 \begin_inset Newline newline
46659 \begin_inset Flex URL
46662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46664 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46672 \begin_layout Bibliography
46673 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46674 LatexCommand bibitem
46680 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46682 name "Documentation"
46683 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46687 of the LaTeX-package
46692 \begin_inset Index idx
46695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46696 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46702 \begin_inset Newline newline
46706 \begin_inset Flex URL
46709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46711 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46719 \begin_layout Bibliography
46720 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46721 LatexCommand bibitem
46727 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46729 name "Documentation"
46730 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46734 of the LaTeX-package
46739 \begin_inset Index idx
46742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46743 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46749 \begin_inset Newline newline
46753 \begin_inset Flex URL
46756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46758 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46766 \begin_layout Bibliography
46767 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46768 LatexCommand bibitem
46774 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46776 name "Documentation"
46777 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46781 of the LaTeX-package
46786 \begin_inset Index idx
46789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46790 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46796 \begin_inset Newline newline
46800 \begin_inset Flex URL
46803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46805 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46813 \begin_layout Bibliography
46814 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46815 LatexCommand bibitem
46821 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46823 name "Documentation"
46824 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46828 of the LaTeX-package
46833 \begin_inset Index idx
46836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46837 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46843 \begin_inset Newline newline
46847 \begin_inset Flex URL
46850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46852 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46860 \begin_layout Bibliography
46861 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46862 LatexCommand bibitem
46868 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46870 name "Documentation"
46871 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46875 of the LaTeX-package
46880 \begin_inset Index idx
46883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46884 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46890 \begin_inset Newline newline
46894 \begin_inset Flex URL
46897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46899 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46907 \begin_layout Bibliography
46908 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46909 LatexCommand bibitem
46915 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46918 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46922 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46923 \begin_inset Newline newline
46927 \begin_inset Flex URL
46930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46932 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46940 \begin_layout Bibliography
46941 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46942 LatexCommand bibitem
46948 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46951 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46955 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46956 \begin_inset Newline newline
46960 \begin_inset Flex URL
46963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46965 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46973 \begin_layout Bibliography
46974 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46975 LatexCommand bibitem
46981 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46984 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46988 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46989 \begin_inset Newline newline
46993 \begin_inset Flex URL
46996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46998 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47006 \begin_layout Bibliography
47007 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47008 LatexCommand bibitem
47014 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47017 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47021 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
47022 \begin_inset Newline newline
47026 \begin_inset Flex URL
47029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47031 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47039 \begin_layout Bibliography
47040 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47041 LatexCommand bibitem
47047 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47050 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47054 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
47055 \begin_inset Newline newline
47059 \begin_inset Flex URL
47062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47064 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47072 \begin_layout Bibliography
47073 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47074 LatexCommand bibitem
47080 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47083 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47087 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
47088 \begin_inset Newline newline
47092 \begin_inset Flex URL
47095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47097 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47105 \begin_layout Bibliography
47106 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47107 LatexCommand bibitem
47113 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47116 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47120 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
47121 \begin_inset Newline newline
47125 \begin_inset Flex URL
47128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47130 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47138 \begin_layout Bibliography
47139 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47140 LatexCommand bibitem
47146 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47149 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47153 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
47154 \begin_inset Newline newline
47158 \begin_inset Flex URL
47161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47163 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47171 \begin_layout Bibliography
47172 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47173 LatexCommand bibitem
47179 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47182 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47186 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
47187 \begin_inset Newline newline
47191 \begin_inset Flex URL
47194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47196 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47204 \begin_layout Bibliography
47205 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47206 LatexCommand bibitem
47212 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47215 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47219 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
47220 \begin_inset Newline newline
47224 \begin_inset Flex URL
47227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47229 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47237 \begin_layout Bibliography
47238 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47239 LatexCommand bibitem
47245 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47248 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47252 about new features in
47257 \begin_inset Newline newline
47261 \begin_inset Flex URL
47264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47266 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47274 \begin_layout Standard
47275 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47309 \begin_inset Note Note
47312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47319 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47320 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47321 bibliography is the second one:
47329 \begin_layout Standard
47330 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47331 LatexCommand bibtex
47332 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47333 options "biblio/alphadin"
47340 \begin_layout Standard
47341 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
47344 \begin_layout Standard
47345 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47346 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47352 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47353 LatexCommand printindex